Home

Canon PIXMA MP282 User Guide Manual

1. E8 Note See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 238 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Opening Saved Files A103 Easy PhotoPrint EX lt Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu anon Capp PRetebane D File Edit View Help Select the Ram you want to create from the many Select LOrery to access saved tems The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX in icon view only for Windows 7 Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64 bit editions of Windows 7 Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Edit screen appears 3 Edit the file if necessary ES Note See the following sections for details on the editing procedures gt Editing Album Editing Calendar Editing Stickers gt Editing Layout Print E Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 239 of 707 pages Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats extensions Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint
2. O My bce D QD Ote a B Q Categories 3 Q Prete Q Portrait Q Othe gt ror Pant gt Send P Edil Convest Covert b tent Me Selections E Jumo to Man Meru Ctre herhan Pictare WD Navigate DAMO D MOL jeg The Correct Enhance Images window opens ES Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box In that case only the target image outlined in orange can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 3 Select the image you want to correct enhance from the thumbnail list The selected image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals gt Cek 1o elect the image ET Prtecence Z Ba H G al zoan A G a SB ane Cove Ab Ai Categoce Ede Custom Cateoonns Spocity Folder v Preto wais Selected 5 Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Face Sharpener Ib tato Photo Fix 22 29 Dy Face Smoothing Ent C Users Unertarne Pictured MP Navigator EX 2010 0101003 jpg E8 Note If you selected only one image in the View amp Use window the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears 4 Select Manual then click Correct Enhance 5 Click Face Brightener Face Sharpener Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish Remover 1 3 Weak mip Sheng Spec
3. Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons the results will be reflected in the preview image Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items e le Saturation Color Balance Adjust the saturation vividness and color tone of the image Use this function to brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors s gt Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance er Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image If the image is too dark or too bright or if the image quality is flat due to lack of contrast you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast s Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Adjustment Buttons Page 548 of 707 pages ira Histogram A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image You can specify the darkest level shadow and brightest level highlight within an image cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image gt Adjusting Histogram a Curve Settings Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph tone curve showing the balance of tone input and output You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area Adjustin
4. leno E Show this window of tatup 4 Click the corresponding icon Custom Scan with One click Tab s gt One click Mode Screen 5 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned 6 Set the document size and scanning resolution as required 7 Start scanning Starts scanning E8 Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Page 365 of 707 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions S400 Useful MP Navigator EX Functions With MP Navigator EX you can correct enhance scanned images beautifully and search saved images quickly e Correcting enhancing images automatically gt Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically e Correcting enhancing images manually s gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually e Adjusting color characteristics such as brightness and contrast Adjusting Images e Searching for lost images gt Searching Images Classifying and sorting images Classifying Images into Categories Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Page 366 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically S
5. Changing the Machine Settings Page 593 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page 594 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used Managing the Machine Power gt Reducing the Machine Noise gt Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing the Print Options Page 595 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options P413 Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off The procedure for changing the print options is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Options on the Page Setup tab PR ask Setup E Main 3 Page Setup of Erects Af Martenance El
6. e Moves the selected image down one page gt i e Moves the selected image to the end E8 Note You can also drag the image to rearrange the order e Delete Selected Pages Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Create Edit PDF file Window Page 435 of 707 pages Deletes the selected image e Add Page Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file EA Note A password will be required to add a password protected PDF file e Undo Cancels the latest change made e Reset Cancels all the changes made e Save Selected Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box Specify the save settings Only the selected page is saved E8 Note When multiple pages are selected a multiple page PDF file is created See Save as PDF file Dialog Box for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box e Save All Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box Specify the save settings and save all pages in the list as one PDF file or save all pages as separate PDF files E8 Note See Save as PDF file Dialog Box for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box e Finish Closes the Create Edit PDF file window e Toolbar e Rotate Left Rotates the page 90 degrees counter clockwise R Rotate Right Rotates the page 90 degrees clockwise Preview Mode Switches to Preview Mode The selected page appears in Preview Reararge Pages i lt lt gt gt i Delete Select
7. 2 Load only the desired number of sheets to copy 2 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type The Paper lamp indicates the selected page size and media type Here we select A4 or 8 5 x 11 Plain Paper EA Note You can select the following page sizes and media types A4 or 8 5 x 11 Plain Paper A4 or 8 5 x 11 Photo Paper 10x 15 cm or 4 x 6 Photo Paper You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel See Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter When the Fit to Page copy function is enabled you can copy the original in the size automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size In this case the original is copied with borders on the plain paper and without borders on the photo paper Cancel the Fit to Page copy function to copy the original in the same size See Fit to Page Copying 3 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts copying While copying is in progress the number on the LED flashes and decreases by one to indicate the remaining number of copies to be made Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is completed To make 10 to 19 copies The paper out error will occur E 0 2 will appear on the LED when all of the loaded paper runs out Press th
8. Caren seres On screen Manual r ED a VA Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting 1 Display the document Display the document to be added to My Manual 2 Click My Manual The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual ES Note Click to close or display the My Manual pane 3 Register the document to My Manual Click Add The title of the currently displayed document is added to List of My Manual E8 Note You can also add documents to My Manual by the following methods If you add a document to My Manual a yy mark is displayed in the document icons in the contents pane From the Recently Displayed Documents list double click the document title that you want to add to My Manual or select the document and press Enter key to display the title and then click Add Right click the document title displayed in the contents pane or right click the explanation window and then select Add to My Manual from the right click menu Inthe contents pane select the document title that you want to add to My Manual and then click Add to My Manual at the bottom right of the pane Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Documents to My Manual Page 96 of 707 pages 4 Display My Manual When you double click or select and press Enter key a document title displayed in List of My Manual that document is displayed in the explanation window
9. Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Software Problems Page 660 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems S930 Software Problems E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program gt Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor s gt Scanned Image Does Not Open Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Page 661 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program S931 E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program Check 1 MP Navigator EX may not support the e mail software program The following e mail software programs are supported Images are attached to the mail message automatically Microsoft Outlook Windows Mail Windows Vista Outlook Express Windows XP Check 2 If an e mail software program does not operate properly check that the program s MAPI is enabled To enable MAPI refer to the manual of the e mail software program Check 3 If using an e mail software program other than the ones listed above select
10. Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Print to End of Job Page 615 of 707 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Cannot Print to End of Job U311 Cannot Print to End of Job e Check 1 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 2 Is the space of your computer s hard disk sufficient Delete unnecessary files to free disk space Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 616 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks U313 No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 617 of 707 pages e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Sat
11. Print Selected Documents You can select and print the documents that you want to print 1 5 From Select Target select Selected Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select and check the title check boxes of the documents to be printed E8 Note When you select the Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies check box the check boxes of all document titles found in the lower hierarchies are selected Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed Execute print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 90 of 707 pages Printing This Manual Page 91 of 707 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print My Manual You can select and print documents registered in My Manual For details about My Manual see Registering Documents to My Manual 1 From Select Target select My Manual
12. Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 170 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Blemish Remover Function A065 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears owe RedEye Connector 22 Face Shspene SS Digtal Face Smoothing Ent CA Users UserNamelgitlieg Selected 3 E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced m See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Blemish Remover Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 171 of 707 pages kd ARA RedEye Connection 2 Face Brightener 29 Face Sharpener os Digtal Face Smoothing Speciy the ares pou
13. e View scanned images Select this checkbox to display the thumbnails of scanned images in a different window e Scan Scanning starts ES Note When scanning starts the progress will be displayed Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open Follow the prompt to complete For details see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in Scan Tab Preferences dialog box ons ll e Instructions _ This page appears e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan preview settings Preferences Dialog Box e Close Closes ScanGear Related Topic Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preferences Dialog Box Page 552 of 707 pages Wiesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Preferences Dialog Box 808 Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences in the ScanGear scanner driver screen to open Preferences dialog box In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to ScanGear functions via the Scanner Preview Scan and Color Settings tabs Scanner Preview Scan_ Color Settings quiet Mode Select Folder Where Temporary Fies are Saved Ci Weers Leerarea ApeOata Ferel Sound Settings Fl Play Muse During Scanning Ci Windows Meda CS
14. Check abum print sattngs Cik the Pring Button to print with the ovrent senings Printing starts Prener canon oce Copas 1 Paper Sue Aa Pagar Source Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy 1 vi Pring Quality Standar bd Duplex Prntng Qualty Settings Borderiess Preng Advanced A memory of summer When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save E Note Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Holidays Page 235 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Holidays A099 Easy PhotoPrint EX Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar on Click Set Holidays in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or click Setup Period Holiday in the Edit screen and click Set Holidays in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box To add a holiday click Add The Add Edit Holiday dialog box appears To edit a saved holiday select it and click Edit To delete a holi
15. Correct Enhance Images Window Page 179 of 707 pages Removes moles in the selected area OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area Undo Cancels the latest correction enhancement Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced adjusted image the selected one Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Toolbar Toolbar a g Zoom In Zoom Out Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the image w Full Screen Displays the entire image in Preview Compare Displays the Compare Images window You can compare the images before and after the correction enhancement adjustment side by side The image before the correction enhancement adjustment is displayed on the left and the image after the correction enhancement adjustment is displayed on the right Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Still Images from Videos Page 180 of 707 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating Still Images from Videos A160 Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating Still Images from Videos You can capture video frames and create still images P important n
16. Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Stamp Page 270 of 707 pages 3 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Stamp Settings Not Saved Eae Roro Placemert Save setings Rare Type Text Sagp Tec TrueType Fort a Rye Regaar X S 3 Osina Cor RGB 192 192 192 Select Color 4 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window e Stamp tab Select Text Bitmap or Date Time User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type e For Text registration the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text If necessary change the TrueType Font Style Size and Outline settings You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color e For Bitmap click Select File and select the bitmap file omp to be used If necessary change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area e For Date Time User Name the creation date time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text If necessary change the settings of TrueType Font Style Size and Outline You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color P important Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date Time User Name is selected e Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the stamp position by dragging t
17. Originals to copy See Originals You Can Load Paper for printing See Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare for copying 1 Turn on the power See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Documents 3 4 Load an original on the Platen Glass See Loading Originals Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO COPY FACING DOWN and align it with the alignment mark as shown below Then close the Document Cover gently E8 Note For details on the types and conditions of the original which can be copied and how to load the original see Loading Originals Characters and lines written with a light colored pen or highlight pen may not be copied properly 2 Start copying 1 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies max 20 copies a To make 1 to 9 copies or 20 copies Display the desired number of copies on the LED Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 13 of 707 pages Copying Documents Page 14 of 707 pages Each time you press the button the number on the LED increases by one When F appears the number of copies is set to 20 Press the button again to return to 1 To make 10 to 19 copies 1 Display F on the LED
18. Routine Maintenance EA Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Check 9 Is the inside of the machine dirty When performing duplex printing the inside of the machine may become stained with ink causing the printout to become smudged Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine Routine Maintenance Note To prevent the inside of the machine from stains set the paper size correctly Check 10 Set Ink Drying Wait Time longer Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Open the printer driver setup window Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 625 of 707 pages 3 Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK e Check 11 Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper Depending on the media type the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray In this case load one sheet at a time Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 626 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Re
19. The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify in a dialog box of the One click Mode screen In the Scan Settings dialog box you can make advanced scan settings Scan Settings gt Specty advanced settings for scanning photos and doo rrerts Document Type Document Color Mode Coie Document S20 Leer Scanning Rinokson 300 ds El Auto Document x Oesereen F Urchap Mask F Remove gutter shadow Reduce Showthrough E Corect started document E Detect the orentation of tent documents and rotate images Erith 0K eon Ga Diada E Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned When Auto Mode is selected the document type is automatically detected In that case Color Mode Document Size etc are automatically set as well P important Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Color This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of R ed G reen and B lue e Grayscale This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of black and white e Black and White This mode renders the image in black and white The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels threshold l
20. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 362 of 707 pages 8T Fateences_ 2 Ble a To continue scanning bad the mest document and d Scan CEJ Cm i Juno to Main Meru 13 Save the scanned images s gt Saving Saving as PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Easy Scanning with One click Page 363 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Easy Scanning with One click S104 MP Navigator EX Easy Scanning with One click You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Start MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One click Mode screen appears Navigation Mode Screen e E Show tis window af statu 11 Proterences 2 One click Mode Screen gt ft Preterences Note Skip ahead to Step 4 if One click Mode screen is open 3 Click One click Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Easy Scanning with One click Page 364 of 707 pages oe Altech to E ssail D Stat scarring by clicking the button
21. When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed click OK to restart your computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Transporting the Machine Page 694 of 707 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Transporting the Machine U510 Transporting the Machine When relocating the machine pack the machine using the original packing materials If you do not have the original packing materials pack the machine carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box P important Do not transport or store the machine slanted vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the machine 1 Turn the machine off 2 Confirm that the POWER lamp is off and unplug the machine P important Do not unplug the machine while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing green as it may cause malfunction or damage to the machine making the machine unable to print 3 Retract the Paper Support and the Output Tray Extension then close the Paper Output Tray 4 Disconnect the printer cable from the computer and from the machine then disconnect the power plug from the machine 5 Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the machine to keep them from opening during transportation Then pack the machine in the plastic bag 6 Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine in the box P important Pack the machine with the
22. You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes You may not modify the work You must show the title and licensor of the original Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 192 of 707 pages Commercial work along with your creation Share Alike CC You may not use the work for commercial purposes license Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor CC license Attribution CC You must show the title and licensor of the original Others license work along with your creation Attribution No You must show the title and licensor of the original Derivatives CC work along with your creation license You may not modify the work Attribution Share You must show the title and licensor of the original Alike CC license work along with your creation Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor Start Search Starts searching for images and displays the images that match the search text in the Thumbnail window P important Some images such as images in formats other than JPEG do not appear Save Selected Image Saves the image selected in the Selections area Save Selected Images Saves all the im
23. e Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans documents with the specified settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 477 of 707 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Custom Dialog Box 726 MP Navigator EX Custom Dialog Box Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One click tab or in the One click Mode screen to open the Custom dialog box 5 Scan photos or documents and open them wth the registered appbcaton Scan Settings Documert Tygo Futo Mode Coor Ato F Use the scanner atyer Seely Save Settings Asomaticaly save the mage to your compter after scarring Fie rane m X Swen Goo EMN Siren CAlkesiLeeName Pierres MP Navigate Browse 7 Sarre to a Sudfolder wth Curert Date Saro the JPEG Ed file in Adobe RGE Qpen the save dadog box ater scanning the image hout Bd infomation Application Settings Open wth Nore Open the Mew amp Ure dalog box Reset Set E Stat scanning by cheking the one click button Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned When Auto Mode is selected the document type is automatically detected In that case Color Mode Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well P important Document types supported by Auto Mo
24. gt How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Manual Document Selection E Pret Setup Select Target Current Document Saj Start Printing Print Preyew Documents to Be Preited Current Document J anon senes On screen Many EA OA Troubleshooting g m l El print Inked documents Click to display the print pane to the left of the on screen manual ES Note Click to close or display the print pane When you click and then click Page Setup the Page Setup dialog box appears You can then easily set up the paper to be used for printing Click and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box When the dialog box is displayed select the printer to be used for printing The Print Setup tab also allows you to select the printer to be used After selecting the printer to be used click Properties to specify the print settings Click and then click Option Settings to display the Option Settings dialog box You can then set up the printing operation Print document title and page number When this check box is checked the manual name and the page number are printed in the header top of the document Print background color and images When this check box is checked the background color and the image are printed Some images are printed regardless of whether this check box is checked or not Check number of pages to be printed befo
25. Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Creating Editing PDF Files S501 Creating Editing PDF Files Create edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX After scanning documents and saving them open the View amp Use window to create PDF files and add delete pages rearrange the page order etc 9 Chk to select the ag 1T_ Preterences_ 2 a H P Bl Zann a 9 sj es Coe Al Fi Coge Ed Oton Caiognes My Bos Scasnedapated Images v Photo beeper Reet sme tes ta S Becument al Q buinen Card O Portend Q Standard Sze g Dwe v Domen imoye elected v Oos myt Beecet a Toy P moe Jue to Man Meru P Cled herName Pictures MP Nawigatee DAMLI 0 ANIMS 0N jpg P important You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer Creating Editing PDF Files with MP Navigator EX 1 Select images and click PDF EA Note You can select PDF JPEG TIFF and BMP files 2 Click Create Edit PDF file on the list P important For PDF files you can only edit those created with MP Navigator EX You cannot edit PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be edited as well
26. Complete paper feed roller cleaning After the rollers have stopped follow the instruction in the message load three sheets of plain paper into the rear tray and click OK Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Position Page 587 of 707 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Aligning the Print Head Position P028 Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines This machine supports two head alignment methods automatic head alignment and manual head alignment To perform automatic head alignment refer to Aligning the Print Head in the manual Basic Guide and then execute the function from the operation panel of the machine The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows 1 2 a 9 Print Head Alignment Open the printer driver setup window Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens Switch head alignment to manual Check the Align heads manually check box Transmit the settings Click Send and when the confirmation message appears click OK Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens Load paper i
27. Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 131 of 707 pages See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 132 of 707 pages Nel llesel gida Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Printing A045 Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Check calendar perit settings Cick the Pring button to pring wah the current settings Printing starts Printer j Copies 1 rs Paper Sge Paper Source Rear Tray x Meca Type Photo Paper Pius Glossy IL Pring Qualty Standard Page Setup l Duplex fainting i ee T Borderless Preang 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer
28. Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix Also Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears A Auto Photo Fix Ad RedEye Conector 22 Face Shspener 29 Dipta Foce Smocthng Ex CA Users UserName MG000S sips Selected 3 E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 157 of 707 pages The image appears in Preview ES Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Auto Photo Fix then click OK The entire photo is corrected automatically and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by
29. Opens the Scan Import window with Auto Scan selected Scan documents easily by automatically detecting the document type Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Photos Documents Platen Opens the Scan Import window with Photos Documents Platen selected Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen s gt Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window ee Mode Switches to One click Mode screen In the One click Mode screen you can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon s gt One click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box iis Opens this guide Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 407 of 707 pages View _Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 408 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab S703 MP Navigator EX View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab Select View amp Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View amp Use Images on your Computer tab You can open images saved o
30. Postage stamps canceled or Immigration papers uncanceled Internal revenue stamps canceled or Identifying badges or insignias uncanceled Selective service or draft papers Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Checks or drafts issued by Stock certificates governmental agencies Copyrighted works works of art without Motor vehicle licenses and permission of copyright owner certificates of title O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 74 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix gt Tips on How to Use Your Machine C112 Tips on How to Use Your Machine This section introduces the tips on how to use your machine and for printing with optimal quality E Ink is used for various purposes How is ink used for various purposes other than printing Ink may be used for purposes other than printing Ink is not only used for printing but also for cleaning the Print Head to maintain the optimal printing quality The machine has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging In the cleaning procedure ink is pumped out from the nozzles Used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a small amount Does black and white printing use color ink Black and white printing may use ink other than black ink depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver So color ink is consumed eve
31. This function is supported under Windows XP or later However it is not supported under the 64 bit editions of Windows XP This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 5 or later supplied with Canon digital cameras supporting MOV format video recording is not installed Videos may not play smoothly depending on your environment When the color tone of a video is changed via the settings of the graphic driver video card or its utility such a change is not reflected in still images captured from the video Therefore color tones may differ between videos and captured still images In the Select Images screen click x Capture frames from video The Video Frame Capture window and Select Video dialog box appear Video Frame Cacture Select Video Select he video you wart to canture Selected video file wil Se playheck E Desktop D Uitearies IEP ueni E 2 a Network a B Contre Panel Selected 0 E8 Note You can also display the Video Frame Capture window by clicking Capture frames from video in the Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click E Add Image See Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window for details on the Video Frame Capture window In the Select Video dialog box select the folder containing the video from which you want to capture still images The videos in the folder will be display
32. When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords the search results are displayed as shown below Documents Containing Perfect Match Documents containing the entire search character string including spaces exactly as entered perfect match Documents Containing All Keywords Documents containing all keywords that were entered Documents Containing Any Keyword Documents containing at least one of the keywords that were entered 4 Display the document that you want to read From the search results list double click or select and press Enter key the title of the document you want to read When the documents of that title are displayed the keywords found on those documents are highlighted Note The search history remains when you modify the keyword entry and perform search multiple times To delete the search history click located at the right of Keyword and select Clear History which is displayed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Documents to My Manual Page 95 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Registering Documents to My Manual Registering Documents to My Manual Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents easily at any time c Canon H series On screen Manual 4 bck p U Com cx My Manual sewch Print sX My Narud x List of My Manual
33. aa amp BB BB ES O E8 Note When using the machine for the first time scanner calibration starts automatically Wait a while until the preview image appears e Destination Select what you want to do with the scanned image e Print Select this to print the scanned image on a printer e Image display Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor e OCR Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software OCR software is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be edited in word processors and other programs e Output Size Select an output size Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination e Flexible Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames In thumbnail view Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned When no cropping frame is displayed each frame is scanned individually In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed the entire Preview area will be scanned When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned e Paper Size L A4 etc Select an output paper size The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper size You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio e Monitor Size 1024
34. e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well Images cannot be added to password protected PDF files EA Note See Creating Editing PDF Files to delete or rearrange the pages of saved PDF files e Set You can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files s gt PDF Settings Dialog Box e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Add to This is displayed when you select PDF Add Page for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Dialog Box Page 468 of 707 pages To change the file click Browse to specify another one P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP N
35. Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image S944 Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Check In MP Navigator EX deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 670 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If You Cannot Resolve the Problem U151 If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter please contact the seller of the machine or the service center Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers Caution If the machine emits any unusual sound smoke or odor turn it off immediately Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine yourself Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired Before contacting the service center confirm the following e Product name Your machine s name is located on the front
36. Click Print Photo on the list 3 Specify print settings as required In the displayed dialog box specify paper size print count etc s gt Print Photo Dialog Box Print Photo M1 Printer Paper Sie ketier 85x11 Meda Type Plan Poser Page Layout Feto Page Porting F Borderiess Parting fa D Potrat Copies 1 E Yad Photo L Preiau betoro parting 4 Click Print Starts printing E9 Note To cancel while spooling click Cancel To cancel while printing click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status To open a confirmation window for the printer status click printer icon on the taskbar Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Sending via E mail Page 393 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Sending via E mail S504 MP Navigator EX Sending via E mail Send scanned images via e mail P important a MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e mail software programs Microsoft Outlook Windows Mail Windows Vista Outlook Express Windows XP If an e mail software program does not operate properly check that the program s MAPI is enabled To enable MAPI refer to the manual of the e mail software program Note f an e mail software program is not selected manually attach the scanned and saved image to e
37. Color Settings Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 525 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Basic Mode Tab S801 Basic Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on screen steps This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab Cl Adjest cropping frames Image corrections em C Fading covecnon E C iadt correcton Cok Patien 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2 Toolbar 3 Preview Area Ac Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened Settings and Operation Buttons e Select Source e Photo Color Scan color photos e Magazine Color Scan color magazines e Newspaper Grayscale Scan text and line drawings in black and white e Document Grayscale Scan documents and photos in black and white Select this mode to create high resolution black and white images Z Note When you select a document type the unsharp mask function will be active The image adjustment function which adjusts images based on the document type will also be active f you select Magazine Color the descreen function will be active Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 526 of 707 pages e Display Preview Image e Preview Performs a trial scan
38. Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 162 of 707 pages Using the Face Brightener Function Page 163 of 707 pages P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 164 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Sharpener Function A063 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears 22 RedEye Coneetion 92 Face Shspener os Dipal Face Smoothing Ex CA Users UserName gilandiiowerjpg Selected 3 E8 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail lis
39. Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Changing Layout s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving s gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Layout Page 144 of 707 pages How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 145 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A151 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seler the Ram you wart to create from the manu Seber LORY Co access saved tems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 146 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A152 Selecting the Paper a
40. Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab Preferences dialog box El Switch Aspect Ratio This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible Click this button to rotate the cropping frame Click again to return it to the original orientation e Data Size The file size of the preview image when saved in BMP format is displayed Note When the file size exceeds a certain size the value appears in red In that case a warning Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Output Settings Page 542 of 707 pages message appears when you click Scan It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce Data Size To continue scan in whole image view Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 543 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Image Settings S806 Image Settings EEEE P important Do not apply these functions to images without moire dust scratches or faded colors The color tone may be adversely affected Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image Note a Selectable settings depend on color mode settings Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings Image Settings allows you to set the following items e Image Adjustment When Image Adjustment is set the brigh
41. Detect the otertation of text documents and rotate Enages __ Correct slanted doouert POF Compression Sanded P important Only the Security setting is available for images with resolutions outside the range of 75 dpi to 600 dpi e Enable keyword search Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data This will enable an easy search by keyword e Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned e Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation P important This function may not work properly depending on the document language Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds e Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle within 0 1 to 10 degrees or 0 1 to 10 degrees of the document P important The inclination of the following types of documents may not be correct
42. Displaying the Print Results before Printing If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information You can display and check the print result before printing The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab pepe YATE Ng ea pe 3 Meda Type Pisin Peper z Paper Source Roar Troy X Print Qualty HA iyd BD or Quatomn Sat Plan Paper Color irtensty Leter 85711 215 3275 dem Ayo 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the Canon IJ Preview opens and displays the print results Related Topic s Canon IJ Preview Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 278 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size P010 Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size Such a paper size is called custom size The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows You can also se
43. Image Settings Check 3 In MP Navigator EX deselect the Correct slanted document Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Page 657 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed S909 There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Check 1 Exit other applications and try again Check 2 Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again gt Resolution Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Page 658 of 707 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Computer Stops Operating during Scanning 910 Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Check 1 Restart the computer reduce the output resolution in ScanGear scanner driver and scan again Check 2 Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space then scan again Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save when the image size is too large Such as when scanning a large document at high resolution Check 3 For Location of Temporary Files in MP Navigator EX sp
44. LED Light Emitting Diode Displays the number of copies Maintenance code or operational status such as an error code 3 button Specifies the number of copies 4 Ink lamps Light or flash orange when ink runs out etc The lamp on the left indicates the Color FINE Cartridge status and the lamp on the right indicates the Black FINE Cartridge status 5 Paper button Selects the page size and media type 6 SCAN button Starts scanning the original to save it on the computer 7 Stop Reset button Cancels operations You can also press this button to cancel a print copy or scan job in progress 8 Color button Starts color copying You can also press this button to finalize your selection for the setting item Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Main Components Page 8 of 707 pages 9 Black button Starts black amp white copying You can also press this button to finalize your selection for the setting item 10 Fit to Page button Fit to Page lamp Enables the Fit to Page copy function When the Fit to Page copy function is enabled the Fit to Page lamp lights up and you can copy the original automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size When the Fit to Page copy function is disabled you can make copies in the same size as the original 11 8 Maintenance button Specifies the Maintenance code 12 Paper lamp Lights to indicate the page size and media type sel
45. O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 128 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting a Photo A043 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select rrapes for calendar You Can abo add replace ragas later i the edaing process To comet or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button AGON Corrections and enhancements in the resuming screen aq 7 alg a j Som by Date a EE eio a amp Loveres P 1 Coroso E Network be Sane 3MG0009_s399 IMGO002_sJo9 Insde Pages 0 t 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures ES Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click ke Import to Inside Pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area EA Note To delete an image in the selected image area selec
46. Other Scanning Methods gt Scanning with WIA Driver S604 Scanning with WIA Driver You can scan an image from a WIA compliant application and use the image in that application Windows Image Acquisition WIA is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later It allows you to scan documents without using an application Scan documents from a TWAIN compliant application to specify advanced settings for scanning The procedure varies depending on the application The following procedures are examples only For details refer to the application s manual Scanning with WIA Driver 2 0 The following is an example of scanning using Windows Fax and Scan 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Click Scan from New on the File menu The scan setting screen appears 3 Specify the settings Scanner WIA Canan ser Chaage Profile Prete cho Oat rak Sate Fltted bd Calor torme Cetee Bletpe PG UP EG image z Resolution DPD 0 Brightness vu Contrast t3 o 4 Preview cr scan imaget a1 repacage files Boien __tem_ enea e Scanner The currently set product name is displayed To change the scanner click Change and select the product you want to use e Profile Select Photo Default or Documents according to the document to be scanned To save a new Profile select Add profile You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box e Source
47. P important You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Application Settings OCR with Specify an OCR application When MP Navigator EX is specified after the image is scanned the text in the image is extracted and appears in Notepad included with Windows EA Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad included with Windows Click Set on the General tab and specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned When scanning multiple documents you can collect the
48. Printing Does Not Start s gt Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected s gt Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing gt Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Jams Message Appears on the Computer Screen gt For Windows Users s gt Problems with Scanning s gt Software Problems MP Navigator EX Problems If You Cannot Resolve the Problem m FAQs s Instructions for Use Printer Driver s gt General Notes Scanner Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals If an Error Occurs Page 603 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If an Error Occurs U302 If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically Take the appropriate action described in the message The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Page 604 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt The Machine Cannot Be Powered On U303 The Machine Cannot Be Powered On e Check 1 Press the ON button e Check 2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the machine then turn it back o
49. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced adjusted image the selected one Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Correct Enhance 2 Correct Entsance Images Redtye Conechon 25 Face Baghtenet 223 Wek ami Srog Specily the area you wart to corect 9 ke Face Shspener oS Digtal Face Smoothing 99 Blovesh Remover CA Users UserName samph03 jpg Selected 3 Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes in the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider E9 Note For Photo Print red eyes are automatically corrected when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox To correct manually deselect the checkbox Face Brightener Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles in the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider Blemish Remover Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
50. Select a scanner type e Paper size This setting is not available for this machine e Color format Select how to scan the document Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with WIA Driver Page 571 of 707 pages e File type Select a file format from JPEG BMP PNG and TIFF e Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi 300 dpi is set by default gt Resolution e Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 100 to 100 e Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 100 to 100 e Preview or scan images as separate files Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files 4 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right 5 Click Scan When scanning is completed the scanned image appears in the application Scanning with WIA Driver 1 0 The following is an example of scanning using Paint 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Click From scanner or camera from B Select the command to scan a document in the application 3 Select an image type according to the document to
51. Select the background to be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab and then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again lt Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Envelope Page 275 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing an Envelope P406 Printing an Envelope If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information For details on how to load an envelope into the machine refer to Loading Paper in the manual Basic Guide The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows 1 Fold down the paper support 2 Load an envelope into the machine Fold down the envelope flap Orient the envelope so that the address side is on top and the flap is on the left and then load the envelope vertically in the rear tray 3 Open the printer driver setup window 4 Select the media type Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Envelope Select the paper size LR Quick Senp t Man 3 Page Ser
52. Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter Refer to Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide When an error occurs E and number appear alternately on the LED to indicate the error code e g E 1 6 flashing in order EA Note For details on the error codes refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide If an error code with P appears an error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Q A Page top Page 10 of 707 pages Copying Page 11 of 707 pages Fhe Tels E Py Contents gt Copying Copying You can make enlarged or reduced copies of the original to fit the page size and borderless copies of a printed photo besides standard copies Copying Documents Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter Copying Photos Fit to Page Copying A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Documents Page 12 of 707 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Copying gt Copying Documents C021 Copying Documents This section describes the procedure to copy a document of A4 or Letter size on plain paper For the operation see the notes and operation procedure described in the reference page You need to prepare
53. The icon is deleted Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 689 of 707 pages e If you are using Windows Vista when the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Then when the confirmation message appears click Yes The icon is deleted 3 Select the printer driver to be deleted e If you are using Windows 7 click any icon in Printers and Faxes On the commanadbar click Print server properties and then click the Drivers tab If the Change Driver Settings button is displayed click that button When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete e f you are using Windows Vista press the Alt key On the File menu select Run as administrator and then click Server Properties When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Click the Drivers tab In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete 4 Delete the printer driver When you click Remove Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed Select Remove driver and driver package and then click OK In the confirmation dialog box click Yes When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box click Delete 5 Click OK The deletion of the printer driver is complete P important You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers
54. The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select and check the title check boxes of the documents to be printed Note Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 4 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 5 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print All Documents You can print all documents of the on screen manual 1 From Select Target select All Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list and the check boxes are automatically selected ES Note When you uncheck the check box of a document title that document is not printed Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print t
55. WWsers Userhtsme Pictures MP Navigator EX 2010_01_01 Fle rane IMG Save as type JPEG Ed V Save to a Stioider wth Qurrent Date e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP P important You cannot select JPEG Exif when Document Type is Text OCR You cannot select JPEG Exif when Black and White is selected for Color Mode on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver e Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder s
56. cick Uninstall This wil uninstall the program and no further survey wil be made amp Uninstal Gone e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again EA Note When the information is being sent a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed In this case confirm that the program name is IJPLMUI exe then allow it f you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 644 of 707 pages not be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey To send the information automatically see Changing the confirmation screen setting e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again two months later e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program click Uninstall t
57. pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white stripes A Less noticeable horizontal white stripes B More noticeable horizontal white stripes ES Note To print and check the current setting open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box and click Print Alignment Value Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page 591 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles P029 Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern Print the pattern if printing becomes faint or if a specific color fails to print The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows ok 9 gt or Nozzle Check Open the printer driver setup window Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the machine Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray Print a nozzle check pattern Make sure that the machine is on and click Print Check Pattern Printing of the nozzle check pattern begins Click OK when the confirmation message appears The Pattern Check dialog b
58. scan in whole image view s gt Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 7 Select the images you want to scan Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver 8 Click Scan Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image E8 Note Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view 1 After previewing images click Aza Thumbnail on the Toolbar 2 3 4 5 6 Switch to whole image view Bowe Mode Advanced Mode Auto Scan Mode wv Select Source Photicolo 2 Disalay Preview Image Dertnation Oviput See ES Note When the whole image is displayed the icon changes to Whole Image Adjust the scan areas cropping frames Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame scan area on the preview image You can also create two or more cropping frames Page 505 of 707 pages If an area is not specified the document will be scanned at the document size Auto Crop If an area is specified only the portion in the specified area will be scanned gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Set Destination Set Output Size Set Image correctio
59. with Auto Scan S108 MP Navigator EX Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Scan documents easily by automatically detecting the document type P important Supported document types are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD To scan other documents specify the document type s gt Scanning Photos and Documents 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 3 In Scan Import click Auto Scan View 4 Use e E Show this vindow of status 4 Click Specify as required Set the preferences if you want to apply suitable corrections based on the document type When setting is completed click OK s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan 5 Click Scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Folow the procedia below to sean docuerts 97 Preference II 2 Eh ike e ye a o Place Documests Place the ongnal pou mar to ocan Document Type Ato Made lie Click Scan hdo Scanning thats Rescksion beso __ Soecty _ Jumo to Man Meru A message about placing documents appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Click OK to start scanning Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box o
60. 2 3 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu EX 1 Start Solution Menu EX See Solution Menu EX a Click Here Solution Menu EX 2 Click lt Photo Print in the Photo Print menu Easy PhotoPrint EX will be started and the operation screen of Photo Print will appear E8 Note In addition to photo printing functions for creating albums calendars and other photo items are available See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Select a photo to print 1 Select the folder in which images are saved 2 Click the image to print The number of copies appears as 1 and the image you selected appears in the selected image area A You can select two or more images at the same time E8 Note To print two or more copies click a Up arrow to change the number of copies To cancel the selection click the image to cancel in the selected image area A and click Delete Imported Image B You can also use Down arrow to change the number of copies to zero You can also correct or enhance the selected image For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide You can capture and print an image from a video See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Click Select Paper 1 3 A 4 Select the loaded paper 1 Make sure that
61. 7 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts Fit to Page copying Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is complete To make 10 to 19 copies The paper out error will occur when all of the loaded paper runs out Press the Stop Reset button to release the error P important Do not open the Document Cover or remove the original from the Platen Glass until copying is complete Note To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button To set the print quality to Fast speed priority You can set the print quality to Fast speed priority only when A4 or Letter sized plain paper is selected for the page size and media type 1 Press and hold down the Color or Black button for 2 or more seconds in step 7 The LED flashes once 2 Release the button The machine starts copying When the print quality is set to Fast print speed is given priority over quality To give priority to quality press the Color or Black button for less than 2 seconds to copy in the print quality Standard Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Useful Copy Functions Page 325 of 707 pages ASES Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Using Useful Copy Functions U036 Using Useful Copy Functions e Switching the page size between A4 and Letter You can switch the size of paper loaded on the Rear Tray
62. 707 pages The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the g Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E9 Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 167 of 707 pages Nelifiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function A064 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Cor
63. A Good B Bad horizontal white streaks are present O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Head Page 56 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head C096 m Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink so clean the Print Head only when necessary 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Clean the Print Head 1 Press the j Maintenance button repeatedly until H appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The machine starts cleaning the Print Head Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 to 2 minutes 3 Check the print head condition When the cleaning is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode To check the print head condition print the nozzle check pattern See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern E8 Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 57 of 707 pages Bas
64. Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A042 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Calendar from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty pacer sze etc n General Settings then select a desga Cick the button at the bortom to custome calendar elements After spectying paper s22 atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Sze Ad Set Holidays i ponat Onentaton AJO Lanesxage Start from i Perod month s Design Inside Pages is Settings Background 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Start from Period ES Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can add holidays to your calendar gt Setting Holidays 3 Select a layout for Design If necessary make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background EA Note You can customize the calendar display font colors of the dates and days of the week position and size of the calendar etc gt Setting Calendar Display You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change Background dialog box To display the Change Background dialog box click Background Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 127 of 707 pages ES Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen
65. Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar The Canon lJ Status Monitor appears 2 Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue The print queue window opens 3 Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu When the confirmation message appears click Yes The deletion of the print job is complete P important Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user Ea Note When you perform this operation all print jobs are deleted If the print queue list contained a necessary print job start the printing process over from the beginning Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 686 of 707 pages Updating the MP Drivers Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers s gt Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers s Installing the MP Drivers Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Page 687 of 707 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers P038 Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver ScanGear By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers unresol
66. Closes the dialog box without printing the photo Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Send via E mail Dialog Box Page 441 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Send via E mail Dialog Box S719 MP Navigator EX Send via E mail Dialog Box Click Send in the View amp Use window then click Attach to E mail on the list to open the Send via E mail dialog box In the Send via E mail dialog box you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e mail Send vis dA wr Stan a mal program and attach the image to e mal Mal Pogan None Attach Manusly 7 Adun attachment fe size Sze Medium ftsina 800by BO window ooo Save nn C sers WUserhiane Pictures MP Navigator EX Mad_20100101 Browse 0K Gareet P important MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e mail software programs Microsoft Outlook Windows Mail Windows Vista Outlook Express Windows XP If an e mail software program does not operate properly check that the program s MAPI is enabled To enable MAPI refer to the manual of the e mail software program E8 Note Only PDF and JPEG files can be attached to e mail e Mail Program The e mail software program set up on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box is displayed Select the e mail software program you want to use e Adj
67. Displayed Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Contact the service center Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed is displayed in the alphanumeric character and depends on the error occurred e 5100 Is Displayed Confirm the movement of the FINE Cartridge Holder blocked Cancel printing from your computer turn off the machine Then clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the FINE Cartridge Holder from moving and turn on the machine again P important Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine The machine may not print out properly if you touch it Ifthe problem is not resolved contact the service center e Four Digit Alphanumeric and Printer error has occurred Is Displayed Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed The power cord may have been unplugged while the machine was still on Check the error message that appears on the computer then click OK The machine starts printing See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord Writing Error Output Error
68. EE cancel oo Heb 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose P important When you select the Always Print with Current Settings check box all settings specified on the Quick Setup Main Page Setup and Effects tabs are saved and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well Effects tab cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used Click Save to register the specified settings For instructions on registering settings see Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 243 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting a Page Size and Orientation P400 Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab When you are not able to specify them with the application the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows
69. EX Functions Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Adjusting Images Searching Images Classifying Images into Categories Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Saving Saving as PDF Files Creating Editing PDF Files Printing Documents Printing Photos Sending via E mail Editing Files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files MP Navigator EX Screens Navigation Mode Screen Scan Import Documents or Images Tab View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab Custom Scan with One click Tab Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Save Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box View amp Use Window Create Edit PDF file Window Print Document Dialog Box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 82 of 707 pages Print Photo Dialog Box Send via E mail Dialog Box Correct Enhance Images Window One click Mode Screen Auto Scan Dialog Box Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Save Dialog Box Exif Settings Dialog Box PDF Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box Custom Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC Scan Settin
70. EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file el4 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Click Open in the step button area of each screen then select the file you want to edit Double click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with Other Application Software Page 240 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods s gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Various Printing Methods Page 241 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods s gt Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation s gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order s gt Setting the Stapling Margin gt Execute Borderless Printing gt Fit to Page Printing gt Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing s gt Post
71. Envelope Paper load limit Rear Tray 10 envelopes Paper Output Tray load limit We recommend that you remove the previously printed envelope from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration Canon genuine papers Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side and notes on handling paper For information on the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper visit our website Note The Model Number of Canon genuine paper is shown in brackets You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number Purchase paper by name For printing photos e Photo Paper Pro Platinum lt PT 101 gt Media type settings Printer driver Photo Paper Pro Platinum e Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use lt GP 501 gt 1 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Can Use Page 44 of 707 pages Media type settings Printer driver Glossy Photo Paper e Photo Paper Glossy lt GP 502 gt 1 Media type settings Printer driver Glossy Photo Paper e Photo Paper Plus Glossy II lt PP 201 gt 1 Media type settings Printer driver Photo Paper Plus Glossy II e Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss lt SG 201 gt 1 Media type settings Printer driver Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss e Matte Photo Paper lt MP 101 gt Media
72. Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Bonjour is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Adobe Adobe Photoshop Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB 1998 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries ES Note The formal name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista operating system Exif Print This machine supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the camera s image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing from a Computer Page 99 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with the Bundled Application Software Page 100 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software s
73. FINE Cartridges left installed in the machine EA Note When you ask a shipping agent to transport the machine clearly label the box as FRAGILE or HANDLE WITH CARE Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 695 of 707 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window U511 Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window opens E9 Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure print settings that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below In Windows 7 select
74. Fle rane IMG a 7 Save to a Subtolder wth Curent Date Ce Ea P important You cannot select JPEG Exif when Document Type is Text OCR You cannot select JPEG Exif when Black and White is selected for Color Mode on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver Note By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Page 383 of 707 pages Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder 3 Click Save Scanned images are saved according to the settings To further use edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box s gt Creating Editing PDF Files Printing Documents s Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving as PDF Files Page 384 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Saving as PDF Files S113 Saving as PDF Files Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files 1 Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save then click Save as PDF file B i oea ick to select tho mage u HERAA n jE yoma EE Pareme
75. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning o Execute cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute Print head cleaning starts 4 Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem clean it once more Deep Cleaning Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem 1 Open the printer driver setup window N Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute Click OK when the confirmation message appears Print head deep cleaning starts 4 Complete deep cleaning Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Heads Page 585 of 707 pages The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To canc
76. Frame Position and size of the date The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited In the Replace Image dialog box you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Page 225 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos A085 Easy PhotoPrint EX Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position angle and size of images Fa Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click a Edit Image or double click the image EA Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create idtm a Postion Size Crop Frame Date Comments BEM Fie Neme 1MG0032_s 09 Canter Position From Left of Page HH mm From Top of Page 81 75 mm Retation 0 0 Size Custom size V Lock aspact ratio Width 118 54 mm Height 73 044 mm Standard size Set the Center Position Rotation and Size then click OK E Note You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen Select an image in the Ed
77. High 0 a Q E Low High 0 E Q pa Low High Sy ABCDEF 1234567 foes Nomai z Sampie Type A i a H O Q oO Senden a me Qo View Color Patter z P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity Related Topics gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Contrast Page 300 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Contrast P020 Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct increase the contrast On the other hand to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct reduce the contrast No adjustment Adjust the contrast The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open
78. Letter 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load the plain paper on the Rear Tray 3 Load the original on the Platen Glass 4 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type according to the paper loaded in step 2 EA Note When the plain paper is selected for the media type the original is copied with borders When the photo paper is selected for the media type the original is copied without borders and fills the entire page 5 Press the Fit to Page button The Fit to Page lamp lights up ES Note Tocancel Fit to Page copying press the Fit to Page button again When pressing the Fit to Page button the Fit to Page lamp is off and the Fit to Page copying is canceled You can use the Fit to Page button only when you are using the copy function 6 Specify the number of copies max 20 copies To make 1 to 9 copies or 20 copies Display the desired number of copies on the LED Each time you press the button the number on the LED increases by one When the LED displays as follows the number of copies is set to 20 Press the button again to return to 1 To make 10 to 19 copies 1 Press the button repeatedly until the LED displays as follows 2 Load only the desired number of sheets to copy ES Note Pressing the Stop Reset button returns the number of copies to 1 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Page 324 of 707 pages
79. Manuals Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navig Page 340 of 707 pages Soro Settings D Asomstically save the erage to your computer sier scamming t File Name ING Save as type Ato Gs Saven Tren UserName Pitures MP Navigate Bromse F Sawe to a Sutfoider mth Curent Date Open the save dalog box after scanning the image EA Note See the section below for details Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC 4 Click OK The operation will be performed according to the settings when you start scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 341 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanning with the Bundled Application Software What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software s gt Let s Try Scanning Useful MP Navigator EX Functions s Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Screens Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software Page 342 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software S101 What
80. None Attach Manually when prompted to select a program and attach the scanned image manually Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Page 662 of 707 pages Advanced Gude Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced S932 Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Check Set the printing size in the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Page 663 of 707 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor S933 Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Check 1 Change the display setting in the application For details refer to the application s manual If you have any questions contact the manufacturer of the application Ea Note You cannot reduce the image size in Paint To reduce the display size open the images in an application Check 2 Change the resolution setting in ScanGear scanner driver and scan again The higher the resolution the larger the resulting image will be gt Resolution Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Does Not Open Page 664 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems
81. Note Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction enhancement Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct enhance all selected images 7 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected enhanced images as new files ES Note To save only the images you like select them and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images The file format of corrected enhanced images is JPEG Exif Adobe RGB images are saved as sRGB images 8 Click Exit P important The corrections enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Page 369 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually S402 MP Navigator EX Correcting Enhancing Images Manually You can correct enhance scanned images manually 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct enhance ES Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Edit Convert then click Fix photo images on the list
82. Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Editing PDF Files Page 387 of 707 pages If a password protected PDF file is selected you will be prompted to enter the password s gt Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files 3 Add delete pages as required To add an existing file click Add Page and select the file To delete a page select it and click Delete Selected Pages x Create EGt POF file ole Reararge Pages lt lt ho Delete Selectnd Pape Add Page Ma 0N pa CAUrerdherName Picture NO Navigatore DAMLI 0 ANUS ONI jpg ES Note You can add PDF JPEG TIFF and BMP files When adding a password protected PDF file you will be prompted to enter the password 4 Rearrange the page order as required Use the icons to rearrange the order Alternatively drag the thumbnail to the target location Note See Create Edit PDF file Window for details on the Create Edit PDF file window 5 Click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages The Save as PDF file dialog box opens Save as PDF file Dialog Box P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box Setting Passwords for PDF Files 6 Specify the save settings in the Save as PDF file dialog box then click Save Images are saved according t
83. OK Embeds the specified information into the image and closes the screen The specified information is saved e Cancel Cancels the settings and closes the screen Information is embedded when Cancel is clicked after clicking Apply Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Dialog Box Page 466 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt PDF Dialog Box S725 PDF Dialog Box Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click PDF in the One click Mode screen to open the PDF dialog box Scan Setings Documert Tyga Document z Color Mode Coice z Docunedg Size lee y Resshgen ors z C Save Setsengs T Atomaticaly sive the imaga to your computer after scarring amp Fle name mG bai Save as pe POF utie Pages z Saven C Users Userteme Pichres MP Nevigst Bowe F Sawe to a Subfoider mth Curent One Open the save dalog box ater scanning the maze Pophcation Settings Open with None Open the Mew amp Use dslog box Beet __ Sg E Stat scanning by cicking the one click button L___ Ae _ Caneel Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which yo
84. OO Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab a Thumbnail gt Whole Image Switches the view in the Preview area s gt Preview Area ina Rotate Left Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again a a Rotate Right Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again 4 aa Auto Crop Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame MM MIM Check All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view Doo CC Uncheck All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view ala5 55 Select All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue Select All Cropping Frames This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines The settings w
85. Originals gt Loading Originals gt Originals You Can Load C079 m Originals You Can Load You can copy or scan the following originals Types of originals Text document magazine or newspaper Printed photo picture card business card or disc BD DVD CD etc Size W x L Max 8 5 x 11 7 inches 216 x 297 mm E8 Note When loading a thick original such as a book on the Platen Glass you can load it by removing the Document Cover from the machine For details on how to remove or attach the Document Cover refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Routine Maintenance Page 51 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes how to clean the machine when the print result is faint to replace FINE Cartridges when they run out of ink or to take an action when paper does not feed properly When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Replacing a FINE Cartridge Replacing Procedure Checking the Ink Status Cleaning the Machine Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals When P
86. P important When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Images cannot be added to password protected PDF files You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 457 of 707 pages EE Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards BD DVD CD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application In that case select an option other than Auto in Save as type If you select JPEG Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for items detected as documents and for items detected as photos When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Save in Displays the
87. Page 320 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Page 321 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying Copying gt Making Copies gt Reducing or Enlarging a Copy gt Using Useful Copy Functions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Making Copies Page 322 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Making Copies U031 Making Copies For the basic procedure to make copies refer to Copying s gt Reducing or Enlarging a Copy gt Using Useful Copy Functions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Page 323 of 707 pages AdvancedGumide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Reducing or Enlarging a Copy U033 Reducing or Enlarging a Copy The Fit to Page copy function enables you to copy the original automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size ES Note You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel Switching the Page Size between A4 and
88. Pages Easy WebPrint BQ _ Stating Various Sotware Appicstions D Meda Types You Can Use L When Parting Becomes Faint or Colors Are _ Examining the Norde Check Patten Basic Guide Advanced Guide L Replacing a FINE Catndge Dest 2 Checting the ink Status D Tes on How to Use Your Machine m j 1 Click Asers The search pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual E8 Note Click 45h to close or display the search pane 2 Enter a keyword In Keyword enter a keyword for the item to be checked When you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords ES Note You can enter up to 10 search keywords or up to 255 characters Uppercase and lowercase are not distinguished The program can also search for keywords that contain spaces A convenient way of quickly finding a document to be read is to enter keywords as described below To learn how to operate a function you are using Enter the menu name displayed on the operation panel of this machine or on the computer for example frame erase copy To find an explanation of the operation for a specific purpose Enter function item to be printed for example print calendar 3 Click Start Searching Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 94 of 707 pages The search is started and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the search results list
89. Photos Documents Platen The Scan Import window opens 3 Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox then click Open Scanner Driver Folow the proced re below to scan photos of document FT Paefeernce j r Gow zs Gy tone a Asto Seam Piece Documents Pheton Documents Places Open the document cover and place the photo or umeri on the platen oA Color Proto LPR Click Opan Scessor Dieeor Scanner diver Scardiear window opera Using the scanner cover allows pou ts pocty he shverced rete hy scarey Diote the serokton color torne oic Jump to Man Meru The ScanGear screen appears One click Mode Screen Follow these steps to start ScanGear from the One click Mode screen of MP Navigator EX 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the One click Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 2 Click the corresponding icon The corresponding dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 3 Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings then click Scan wv Scan photos or documents and save then to your computer Scan Settings Ato Mode Save Settings D Atomasticaly save the mage to your computer after scanning t File name MG Save as hpe CEE se Swen CAUieers Wseehlaene Pehres MP Navigate Browse V Sawe to a Subfoider wth Curent Date Save the JPEG Bd file in Adobe RGB Opon the save Gislog bax ater sc
90. Pope Sue Letter 8 5531 gt El a Onentation la Porras A Lngrcepe M Rotate 180 degrees a xf Sane os Page Size _ a E H 3 g c EEEE Ld Page Layout Nomalsine m V Aatoenatically reduce large documert that the parter carrot otat Duplex Porting Staple Sde Leng ee taping Let Spectr Margn 1 gt 0 999 ZF S E Port iom Last Page Collate eej 0K Eaa G tet The Print Options dialog box opens pea gt n P oes of pert Disable ICM required ton the appicaton software L Disable the color profile setting of the appication software Lina of Print Data Processing Recommended 0K a ot tee Note When the XPS printer driver is used certain functions are not available 3 Change the individual settings If necessary change the setting of each item and then click OK The Page Setup tab is displayed again Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 596 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile P417 Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time The pr
91. Printing Page 257 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Page Layout Printing P006 Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver TR ask Setup E Man 33 Page Setur gf Efecte _Martenance El Pope Sze Letier 85x117 gt 4 Oeton A Porat A ungego u a F Rotate 180 degrees B Portar Pocer Sae Later 35x11 Duplex Parting Qapie Sde Long sde saping Top Specty Magn 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete 4 Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page Layout Printing Page 258 of 707 pages Page Lay
92. Red Adjust the Red channel e Green Adjust the Green channel e Blue Adjust the Blue channel E8 Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Reading Histograms You can see the histogram of a specified area for each Channel The higher the histogram peak the more data is distributed to that level Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Histogram Page 518 of 707 pages More data is distributed to the More data is distributed to the Data is widely distributed between the highlight side shadow side highlight and shadow Adjusting Histograms Using the Slider Select a Channel then move Black point Slider or A White point Slider to specify the level to be set as the shadow or highlight All parts to the left of am Black point Slider will be black level 0 The parts at Mid point Slider will turn to the color exactly between the black point and white point All parts to the right of A White point Slider will turn white level 255 When Image Adjustment is set to anything but None the adjustments shown below are performed automatically Moving the Black point and White point Sliders Move the Black point Slider or White point Slider to adjust brightness Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Black point Slider toward the highlight side Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the
93. Seket rrages for layout printing You can aso add repace mages brer i the edtng process To comet or enhance mages cick the ComecyEnhance button Apoy Corrections ang enhancements in the resuming screen ag 2is Ae amp Sond bare E iro if a amp Lovares D Coroso E Newark 7 amp p is IG0012_sJo9 1MG000 _sJ99 D4G0002_sio9 Ret pee Inside Pages 0 mage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures ES Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click ke Import to Inside Pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area EA Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click E Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click ay Delete All Imported Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 149 of 707 pages EE Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before print
94. Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Can Move or Copy the Saved File A095 mma S SS How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File If you want to move or copy a file created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another you need to move or copy the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well For example when you save a file named MyAlbum el1 a folder named MyAlbum el1 Data is automatically created in the same folder that contains the MyAlbum el1 file If you want to move or copy the MyAlbum el1 file to another folder move or copy the MyAlbum el1 Data folder as well The MyAlbum el1 Data folder contains the photos used in the album s D a MyAlbum e MyAlbum e IL Data iL E Note The icons may vary depending on the items P important Do not change the Data folder name otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited with Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Page 196 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from A096 Easy PhotoPrint EX Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from As shown below printing starts
95. Standard lt Mengt 0 u h aina im Corte 0 0 9 Low High Doings P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document is printed with the adjusted color balance P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness Page 296 of 707 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Brightness P018 Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed Light is selected Normal is selected Dark is selected The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manu
96. Starts scanning ES Note Click 1 Information to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings document type etc ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box s gt Scan Tab Related Topic Basic Mode Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 499 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning in Advanced Mode S205 Scanning in Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode output resolution image brightness color tone etc when scanning This section explains how to scan a single document See Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver to scan multiple documents at one time P important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case click Thumbnail on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly Documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes P
97. This Software This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size etc when scanning documents It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone as it allows you to make various corrections and adjust brightness contrast etc Screens There are three modes Basic Mode Advanced Mode and Auto Scan Mode Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen Basic Mode Advanced Mode Auto Scan Mode EA Note ScanGear starts in the last used mode Settings are not retained when you switch modes Basic Mode Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on screen steps D 3 and 9 3 Ga BB 8888 Y C Adjest cropping frames Image corrections ED Clean corecnon By Elodia corecton Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify color mode output resolution image brightness color tone etc when scanning Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 493 of 707 pages Auto Scan Mode Use the Auto Scan Mode tab to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking Scan Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 494 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Applicati
98. Toolbar 3 Thumbnail Window 4 Selected Images Area ee ee e Supported Documents Photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly To scan other documents specify the document type A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos gt Scanning Photos and Documents Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents E8 Note To reduce moire open the Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window and set Document Type to Magazine Color Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Page 413 of 707 pages Settings and Operation Buttons View amp Use Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer The View amp Use window opens s gt View amp Use Window e Auto Scan Displays the screen for scanning documents by automatically detecting the document type etc e Photos Documents Platen Click this when you want to scan photos documents magazines and
99. White point Slider toward the shadow side the Images with widely distributed data Move the Black point Slider toward the highlight side and White point Slider toward the shadow side Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Histogram Page 519 of 707 pages Moving the Mid point Slider Move the Mid point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Mid point Slider toward the highlight side Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the Mid point Slider toward the shadow side has gt amry Adjusting Histograms Using the Droppers When you select a Channel and click the Black point Mid point or White point Dropper the mouse pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to change the setting a a Zio 4 apa Gray Balance The point clicked with ua Black point Dropper will be the darkest point You can also enter a value 0 to 245 The point clicked with Ud Mid point Dropper will be the middle of the tonal range You can also enter a value 5 to 250 The point clicked with ua White point Dropper will be the brightest point You can also enter a value 10 to 255 Click Dropper for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview image The clicked point will
100. XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and only the stamp function can be used 3 Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box and select the stamp to be used from the list The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the stamp details If necessary specify the following settings and then click OK Define Stamp button To change the stamp text bitmap or position click this see Registering a Stamp Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document check this check box Note The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap When this check box is unchecked the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application used Place stamp over text cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used When the XPS printer driver is used the stamp is normally printed in the foreground of the document Print semitransparent stamp Check this check box to print a semi transparent stamp on the document This function is available only when the XPS printer driver is used Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed
101. and frame int Capture Captures still images according to the settings You can capture up to 150 frames at a time from one video Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 184 of 707 pages Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Page 185 of 707 pages Select Video Displays the Select Video dialog box Select a folder then select the video from which you want to capture still images Save Saves the still images selected in the Captured frame s area Exit Click to close the Video Frame Capture Movie Print window 2 Preview Area The video selected in the Select Video dialog box appears in Preview a gt Frame backward Frame advance Click to reverse advance one frame and pause You can also click during playback to reverse advance one frame and pause Plays or pauses the video Pause appears while a video plays and Ea Playback appears while a video is stopped a Stop Stops the video EE Captures the current frame and displays the still image in the Captured frame s area You can also capture during playback aa a Mute Clear mute Switches audio OFF ON Playback Slider Displays the video playback progress Current playback time is displayed to the left of the slider Caia Set start time Set end time Set the start end time of the time range from which to capture still images automatically ES Note These buttons are displayed only when the Auto Frame Captu
102. and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 133 of 707 pages 3 Click Print Ee Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Stickers Page 134 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers A050 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers s gt How Ca
103. be scanned DS usg A What do you want to scan f P hassnsssnrsnnnsnnsnnennennnnnan ra Select an enter Below for the hoe of picture you d wart to scan You can also ES Note To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture select Custom Settings 4 Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with WIA Driver Page 572 of 707 pages e Advanced Properties Advanced Properties Q 7 uw o Resoktion OP I Picture ype 150 gt Coker picture zj Rot e Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 e Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 e Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi gt Resolution e Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your document e Reset Click to restore the original settings 5 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right Drag LJ to specify the scan area 6 Click Scan When scanning is comple
104. boost the colors in a photo before printing enee tuse ther select the goe and type of paner fr pienng Printer Paor Sete VU vs Prato E P important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box E Note Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox this effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing Photo Noise Page 201 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Reducing Photo Noise A072 Easy PhotoPrint EX Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera noise may appear in the image Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid H Pee sares P important This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Note When the noise is severe change Normal to Strong The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Pag
105. box gt Scan Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 502 of 707 pages Related Topic Auto Scan Mode Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 503 of 707 pages Nelifirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver 208 You can scan two or more photos small documents on the Platen at one time on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab P important Toscan multiple documents as a single image scan in whole image view The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case adjust the cropping frames scan areas in whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly Documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes EA No
106. ca Landscape Rotate 190 degrees B Prea Peper Sae Leter 85x11 o Ouplex Parting Long ade taping Let Specty Margin foes fp 1 gt 1 333 F 5 i Part tom Last Page 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the margin for stapling and the margin width Click Specify and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box and then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Booklet Printing Page 263 of 707 pages C Mogn for taping Lek X e hoet blank page Magn 04 gt nhs 0012 Page Border Conci _ Onta He Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank check the check box and select the page to be left blank Margin Enter the margin width The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page Page Border To print a page border around each document page check the check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper When the printing of one side is complete set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK When the printing of the other side is complete fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a book
107. computer s disc drive then perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX to install e The machine is connected to a computer correctly Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable when scanning images with the machine or when the computer is in the sleep or standby mode e The destination and the file name are specified in MP Navigator EX You can specify the destination and the file name in MP Navigator EX For details on how to perform settings or the initial settings refer to Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC EA Note When scanning with using the Operation Panel of the machine the document type is automatically detected and the settings in document size and resolution are automatically set 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load the original on the Platen Glass Ee Note a Refer to Placing Documents for how to load the original on the Platen Glass 3 Press the SCAN button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Page 337 of 707 pages Scanning starts and the images are forwarded to the computer according to the settings specified in MP Navigator EX Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is complete 4 Specify MP Navigator EX 4 0 If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista The program selection screen may be
108. cover of the setup manual e Serial number please refer to the setup manual e Details of the problem e What you tried to solve the problem and what happened Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals FAQs Page 671 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FAQs U340 FAQs s gt No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Cannot Install the MP Drivers s gt Printing Does Not Start s gt Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed gt Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Print Results Not Satisfactory Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 672 of 707 pages Nelieijesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Instructions for Use Printer Driver P036 Instructions for Use Printer Driver This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver Restrictions on the Printer Driver e With some applications the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled In this case use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software e If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface language the driver scree
109. displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned EA Note You can specify the scan area cropping frame on the displayed image In thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame per image In whole image view you can create multiple cropping frames gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 531 of 707 pages Related Topic Scanning in Basic Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Page 532 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Advanced Mode Tab S803 Advanced Mode Tab This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode output resolution image brightness and color tone This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab Nyre ou nore Nore here None hore ewon Cree oe 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2 Toolbar 3 Preview Area Ea Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened Settings and Operation Buttons e Favorite Settings You can name and save a group of settings Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings and Color Adjustment Buttons on Advanced Mode tab and load it as re
110. documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side When you click found to the left of eS the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed RE Z Note Click 2 etet to close or display the contents pane Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Operating the Explanation Window Page 88 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window Explanation Window Advanced Gvide Advanced Gude How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual o Operating the Explanation Window Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document gt Trademarks and Licenses a 1 Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document 2 The cursor jumps to the top of this document Window Used in Operation Explanation This on screen manual describes with a window displayed when the Windows 7 operating system Home Premium called Windows 7 below is used Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing This Manual Page 89 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Manual Printing This Manual E Canon M vestes On screen Manual q Back p Gh Comens r MyManual 2 Search E Pint
111. e Scan Scanning starts E Note When scanning starts the progress will be displayed Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open Follow the prompt to complete For details see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in Scan Tab Preferences dialog box It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size In that case a warning message appears It is recommended that you reduce the total size To continue scan in whole image view e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan preview settings gt Preferences Dialog Box e Close Closes ScanGear scanner driver Toolbar e Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view In thumbnail view as Sql In whole image view goose Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Bano ee EEE Page 534 of 707 pages Advanced Mode Tab a Thumbnail Whole Image Switches the view in the Preview area Preview Area Clear Click this button to delete the preview image It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse Move Image If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area you can click this button and drag the image across the scree
112. e Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution EA Note The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text OCR 300 dpi 400 dpi Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page 422 of 707 pages e Auto Photo Fix Auto Document Fix The displayed item varies by Document Type e Auto Photo Fix This is displayed when Document Type is Color Photo Select this checkbox to automatically analyze the captured scene landscape night scene etc and apply suitable corrections e Auto Document Fix This is displayed when Document Type is Color Document Black and White Document or Magazine Color Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability P important When this checkbox is selected the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Black and White Photo or Text OCR The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan e Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned De
113. exceeds 0 1 inches 3 mm 2 Load envelopes 1 Open the Paper Support Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Envelopes Page 41 of 707 pages Do not raise the Paper Support 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the envelopes in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the envelopes Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The envelopes may not be fed properly J B Rear side C Address side E8 Note Do not load envelopes higher than the Load Limit Mark D 3 Specify the settings with the printer driver Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Envelopes Page 42 of 707 pages 1 Select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup sheet 2 Select DL Env or Comm Env 10 in the Envelope Size Setting window 3 Select Landscape in Orientation gt Important If you do not specify the envelope size or orientation properly the address will be printed upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees Note The machine may make operating noise when feeding envelopes f the print result is upside down open the printer driver setup window select Envelope in Commonly
114. folder specified in Save in e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder file name and Exif information Save Dialog Box EA Note To set passwords for PDF files select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image After scanning you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Scanner Button Settings Page 487 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Scanner Button Settings 743 Scan Settings Dialog Box Scanner Button Settings The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify on the Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box gt Specty adwanced settings for scanning photos and doo rrerts Documert Type E Recommended image Comecton Descreen Urahap Mask Remove gutter shadow Reduce Show through Corect slanted documert Detect the oriertation of text documents and rotate Fnages English e Document Type Auto Scan is set P important Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placi
115. for 2 or more seconds in step 5 See To set the print quality to Fast speed priority To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 18 of 707 pages Fit to Page Copying Page 19 of 707 pages A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Page 20 of 707 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Scanning Scanning You can save scanned data on your computer and edit or process them with the supplied software application Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Preparing for Scanning with the Operation Panel Saving Scanned Data on the Computer A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Page 21 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Scanning gt Saving Scanned Data on the Computer C041 Saving Scanned Data on the Computer This section describes the procedure to scan originals using the Operation Panel on the machine and save them on the computer according to the settings specified with MP Navigator EX For operations to scan originals from the computer refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide gt Important Please note that Canon shall not be liable for any damage or loss of the data for any reason whatsoever even within the warranty period of the machine m Preparing for Scanning with the Operation Panel Before scanning originals check the following Are the n
116. frames will be displayed in thick broken lines The settings will be applied to all the cropping frames Lad Remove Cropping Frame Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 535 of 707 pages Advanced Mode Tab Page 536 of 707 pages Removes the selected cropping frame YT Information Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings document type etc e Open Guide This page appears Preview Area e Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview You can also check the results of the settings image corrections color adjustments etc made in Settings and Operation Buttons When nal Thumbnail is displayed on the Toolbar Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned ES Note When multiple images are previewed different outlines indicate different selection status Focus Frame thick blue outline The displayed settings will be applied Selected Frame thin blue outline The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key Unselected no outline The settings will not be applied When Whole Image is displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image All portions in the cropping frames will be scann
117. from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration Note You can easily specify print settings with Easy PhotoPrint EX provided on the Setup CD ROM Install it on your computer Page Sizes You can use the following page sizes Standard sizes Letter 8 50 x 11 00 inches 215 9 x 279 4 mm Legal 8 50 x 14 00 inches 215 9 x 355 6 mm A5 5 83 x 8 27 inches 148 0 x 210 0 mm A4 8 27 x 11 69 inches 210 0 x 297 0 mm B5 7 17 x 10 12 inches 182 0 x 257 0 mm 4 x 6 4 00 x 6 00 inches 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 4 00 x 8 00 inches 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 5 00 x 7 00 inches 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 8 00 x 10 00 inches 20 x 25 cm L 3 50 x 5 00 inches 89 0 x 127 0 mm 2L 5 00 x 7 01 inches 127 0 x 178 0 mm Hagaki 3 94 x 5 83 inches 100 0 x 148 0 mm Hagaki 2 7 87 x 5 83 inches 200 0 x 148 0 mm Comm Env 10 4 12 x 9 50 inches 104 6 x 241 3 mm DL Env 4 33 x 8 66 inches 110 0 x 220 0 mm Choukei 3 4 72 x 9 25 inches 120 0 x 235 0 mm Choukei 4 3 54 x 8 07 inches 90 0 x 205 0 mm Youkei 4 4 13 x 9 25 inches 105 0 x 235 0 mm Youkei 6 3 86 x 7 48 inches 98 0 x 190 0 mm Card 2 16 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Wide 4 00 x 7 10 inches 101 6 x 180 6 mm Non standard sizes You can also specify a custom size within the following range Minimum size 2 17 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Maxi
118. from the Print History Page 682 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History P048 Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used In the Canon IJ XPS preview window you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history to print the document The procedure for using the Canon lJ XPS Preview is as follows E Grayscale Printing E Dyplex Printing Page 2 1 Print Combine Documents T om gp Delete Document ut i7 Reset Documents T View Thumbnails a g D Fo E o IL Move Document 4 4 gt DI Move Page Ck Delete Page E Note Click S50 View Thumbnails to view all print pages of the print document selected from the Document Name list To hide the print pages click ml View Thumbnails again Editing and Printing a Print Job When printing multiple documents or pages you can combine documents change the print sequence of the documents or pages or delete documents or pages Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 683 of 707 pages 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab 3 Complete the setup Click
119. functions as the printer driver use Word to specify them e When selecting Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab the selected printing function may not be effective depending on the version of Word If this happens follow the procedure below 1 Open Word s Print dialog box 2 Open the printer driver setup window specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab and click OK 3 Without starting printing close the Print dialog box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 673 of 707 pages 4 Open Word s Print dialog box again 5 Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK 6 Start printing e f bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator Adobe Systems Inc printing may take time or some data may not be printed printing may take time or some data may not be printed Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Notes Scanner Driver Page 674 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt General Notes Scanner Driver S004 General Notes Scanner Driver ScanGear scanner driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep these points in mind when using it Scanner Driver Restrictions When using the NTFS file system the TWAIN data source may not be invoked This is because th
120. gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Mail Dialog Box S722 MP Navigator EX Mail Dialog Box Click Attach to E mail on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click Mail in the One click Mode screen to open the Mail dialog box L Sean photos or documents and send then via cesail Scan Settings Document Tyge Document Color Mode Coice x Doane Sse Resohgon 300 E Use tt scanner diver Sey Save Setungs Ble Sze Medium fes in a 00 by 600 window Fie name mG X Save as hpe reses z St Saven CAlas eeNamo Pictures MP Navigate Browse F Sarre to a Subfoider mth Cument Date dtachmert Settings Mal Progam None Attach Manually 7 E Stat scanning by clicking the one click button o C Cn C Dots posen Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Wier 850 inches 1 008 50 Keogh 11 09 inches 1 00 11 65 P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document
121. gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX s gt Printing Photos Creating an Album gt Printing Calendars Printing Stickers Printing Layout Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites gt Questions and Answers s gt Photo Print Settings s gt Other Settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 101 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX A000 What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily SS 2 Eany PhetePrint D file Edt View Help Select the Rams you want to create from the menu Select LOraey to access saved rems Stickers Layout Print P important Easy PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers It does not support some Canon compact photo printers including SELPHY CP series fa printer that supports Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed you cannot print items you create If Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy LayoutPrint installed Easy LayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy PhotoPrint EX E Note See Help of Easy PhotoPrint EX for des
122. image at the paper size enlarged or reduced Borderless Printing Print the image on an entire sheet of paper without borders Page Layout Printing 2 on 1 Layout and print two images on a sheet of paper Page Layout Printing 4 on 1 Layout and print four images on a sheet of paper e Enlarge Reduce Enlarge or reduce images to print ar Enlarge Reduce Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 437 of 707 pages MP Navigator EX Print Document Dialog Box Page 438 of 707 pages Print a reduced or enlarged image by specifying a scale in increments of 1 e Auto Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size e Scale Select a scale from the list P important At normal size 100 some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped In that case select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size e Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine Note Selectable paper sizes depend on the selected printer e Media Type Select the type of paper for printing Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type Note Selectable paper types depend on the selected printer e Print Quality Select the print quality e Density Click Density adjustment to select the print density
123. in the Correct Enhance Images window 1 Select images and click Edit Convert 2 Click Fix photo images on the list The Correct Enhance Images window opens 3 Correct enhance images in the Correct Enhance Images window Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window See the corresponding sections below for correcting enhancing images s gt Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually i Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Files Page 396 of 707 pages Converting Documents to Text Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad included with Windows P important PDF files cannot be converted to text 1 Select images and click Edit Convert 2 Click Convert to text file on the list Notepad included with Windows starts and editable text appears ES Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad included with Windows Click Set on the General tab and specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned When scanning multiple documents you can collect the extracted text into one file General Tab Text displayed in Notepad included with Windows is for guidance only Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly Documents containing text with fo
124. in the box click z Down arrow You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper Page 109 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting the Paper A013 E Selecting the Paper 1 Click Select Paper The Select Paper screen appears Paper ovce Ml vine Preto TM Photo Nope Reduction ree pepee ris a n g Prot a Pis Getty Phos Paper 2 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer See Help for details The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type E8 Note You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise gt Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Pr
125. is loaded with the printable side facing up Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 618 of 707 pages Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side Check 6 Is the Platen Glass dirty Clean the Platen Glass Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover When copying see also the sections below Check 7 Make sure that the original is properly loaded on the Platen Glass Loading Paper Originals Check 8 Is the original loaded with the side to be copied facing down on the Platen Glass Check 9 Did you copy a printout done by this machine Reprint from the computer If you copy a printout done by this machine print quality may be reduced Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Unclear Page 619 of 707 pages Nelieirlecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Unclear U314 Colors Are Unclear e Check 1 Enable color correction When printing photographs or other graphics enabling color correction in the printer driver may improve color Select Vivid Photo in the Effects sheet in the printer driver setup window e Check 2 Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly If the Ink Cartri
126. list If this happens restart your computer and then try again Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Before Installing the MP Drivers Page 690 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Before Installing the MP Drivers P040 Before Installing the MP Drivers This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed Checking the Machine Status e Properly connect the personal computer and the machine For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started e Turn off the machine Checking the Personal Computer Settings e Terminate all running applications e In Windows 7 Windows Vista log on as a user who has the administrator account In Windows XP log on as the computer administrator P important Before installing the latest MP Drivers delete the previously installed version For instructions on deleting the MP Drivers see Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Related Topics Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers s Installing the MP Drivers Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Installing the MP Drivers Page 691 of 707 pages Nelieiresel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Installing the MP Drivers P041 Installing the MP
127. mail 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images ES Note Only PDF and JPEG files can be attached to e mail See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Send then click Attach to E mail on the list oy ick to select the image T Pretesmce 2 Cum ri so ee Comal Ad Cogas Edt Custom Categones Hy Bos ScammedAepeted Imeger Seocily Folder v Prom mal Gaod 2S e v Oes fazer Selected 1 Jumo to Man Meru Citivert Uierhlame Pictares MP Mavigatoe EOM 01 021001 jeg 3 Set the e mail software program and file save options as required Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Sending via E mail Page 394 of 707 pages Specify the e mail software program destination folder and file name s gt Send via E mail Dialog Box Send vis E mail A San amal the mal aa a progam and attach the mage toe Mal Pogan None Attach Manus 7 Adjust ottachmers Ho sine Sze Modum fis in a S00 by 600 window xj Swen CAlsers Luer Nane Pictures MP Navigator EX Mal_20100101 Browse Sie rane ING Sm Co Gorcet ES Note You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e mail Click Set to open a dialog box and select a compression t
128. make advanced settings including image correction enhancement and brightness contrast adjustment You can also display the source image and corrected image side by side for comparison mies ll Ba 4 Ce PR e rA Face Shapener gt Eo a a m i i a 7 Ri 7 i Rie CAthen ertam Pictured MP Navigator E 2010 01 02 003jp3 1 Task Area 2 Toolbar P important Image correction enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files E Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement in the Zoom in dialog box It may take a while to correct large images See View amp Use Window for details on the View amp Use window Task Area Available tasks and settings vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click the Auto or Manual tab to open the corresponding tab Auto Tab Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image See Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically for details Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 444 of 707 pages A ox ConrectEnhance images f Prete Ext h Cheni UrerName Pictures MP Navigator X 2010_01_01 003 jpg e Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos e Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time
129. of the application software you are using 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab DR akso Man B Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance 3 Paper Source Rear Troy Pre Quality HA Banded Bone Custom pantona Oefauts 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with ICC Profiles Page 291 of 707 pages 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select None for Color Correction Manual Coles Adjustment es 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver and then Print Print from an application software that cannot identify input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by using the color space of the input ICC profile SRGB found in the data When printing Adobe RGB data you can
130. opens and you can specify the save settings Auto Scan Dialog Box e Save to PC Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer The document type can be detected automatically When you click this icon the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen e Save as PDF file Scan documents and save them as PDF files When you click this icon the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings PDF Dialog Box e Attach to E mail Scan documents or photos and attach them to e mail When you click this icon the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and e mail software program settings Mail Dialog Box e OCR Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad included with Windows When you click this icon the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings OCR Dialog Box e Custom Scan documents photos and open them in a specified application The document type can be automatically detected When you click this icon the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Scan with One click Tab Page 411 of 707 pages application settings Custom Dialog Box e Start scanning by clicking the button Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately p Switch Mode Switches
131. other printed materials The screen for scanning photos and documents appears Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window e Document Type Auto Mode is set e Specify Select whether or not to apply suitable corrections based on the document type gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan e Scan Scanning starts e Clear Delete all images in the Thumbnail window ES Note Images not saved on a computer will be deleted To keep important images use Save or other methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear e Save Save the selected images Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings gt Save Dialog Box e Save as PDF file Save the selected images as PDF files Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the save settings gt Save as PDF file Dialog Box e Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu Toolbar e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box o Guide Opens this guide e Edit Tools mm e dl Select All Selects all images in the Thumbnail window e iii Cancel All Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window E Rotate Left Rotates the target image outlined in orange 90 degrees counter clockwise P Rotat
132. pages to display them again Right click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages 2 Complete the setup After completing the page selection click OK When you execute print only specified pages will be printed P important When Poster is selected the Duplex Printing Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavailable Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it the print results may become coarse Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 261 of 707 pages Booklet Printing Page 262 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Booklet Printing P402 Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet Data is printed on both sides of the paper This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly in page number order when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center ALF The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window DR Qsc Senp Man 3B Page Setup a Erectie A Martenance El Page Sze Leer 3511 4 Orientation la 5 Pora
133. pages with the current layout can be fitted m If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames any image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted starting with the last image that was added to the former layout page E Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Calendar Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Layout Page 216 of 707 pages Edit Took Hara Apply to all pages Bele P important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page E Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Layout Print peat 001 06 007 008 Bek BHAA E Apply to all pages Base P important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the cur
134. print quality the machine allows a margin along each edge of media The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins Recommended printing area HM Canon recommends that you print within this area Printable area L The area where it is possible to print However printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision ES Note Borderless Printing By selecting Borderless Printing option you can make prints with no margins When performing Borderless Printing slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is enlarged to fill the whole page Duplex printing is not available when performing Borderless Printing For Borderless Printing use the following paper e Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT 101 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 e Matte Photo Paper MP 101 This paper can be used only when printing from your computer Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality and or result in printouts with altered color hues Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality Use them only for test printing You can perform Borderless Printing on plain paper only when printing from your computer Borderless Printing is not available for legal A5 or B5 sized paper or envelopes Depending on the type of
135. printer driver becomes invalid 2 When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer Adobe RGB 1998 will not be displayed You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the machine 7 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 8 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method s gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity s gt Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Color Balance Page 294 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Color Balance P017 Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color it changes the total color balance of the document Use the application software when you want to change the color balance significantly Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color ba
136. procedure below 1 Click Start then Computer In Windows XP click Start then My Computer 2 Double click the oe CD ROM icon on the displayed window If the contents of the CD ROM are displayed double click MSETUP4 EXE ES Note Ifthe CD ROM icon is not displayed try the following e Remove the CD ROM from your computer then insert it again e Restart your computer Ifthe icon is still not displayed try different discs and see if they are displayed If other discs are displayed there is a problem with the Setup CD ROM In this case contact the service center e If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen Printer Connection Make sure that the printer is connected to the computer and turn on the printer STEP 5 Setup Printer Connection Prim Head Algnment Recommended s Completion aa 3 STEP 4 Information The printer is not detected Check the connection Help Cancel l If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged into the USB port of the machine and is connected to the computer and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers EA Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 611 of 707 pages The printer is not detected Check the connection may be displayed depending on the computer you use In this case follow the procedu
137. screen appears f i Print maps n the selected By ost Cick the Print button to print with the current settings Printing starts Preter canon ooo Copas Paper Sge E IMS Pagar Sowces Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy It z Print Qai Duplex Prntng Qualty Settings T Borderless Preteg Advanced 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing E9 Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click
138. screen closes Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings When Save as type is Auto a confirmation appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 455 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen S721 MP Navigator EX Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click Save in the One click Mode screen to open the Save dialog box 7 Scan photos or documents and save then to your computer Scan Setings Documert Tyge Auto Mode gt M Coor Ato Ato E Use ie searre diver a pey Save Setings T Atomaticaly save the mage to your compter after scanning File name MG X Save as type Ato j Se Saven CALs enano WPichres MP Nevigats Browse F Save to a Subfolder wth Qurert Date Save the JPEG Bd file in Adobe RGB Opon the sae dalog bax after scanning the mage inet Ed efomaton Sepication Settings Open wth Nene Open the View amp Use dialog Bex E Sar scanning by cicking the one chck button ae aia Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned When Auto
139. senes On screen Manus Adusnced Guide gt Preting trom a Computer gt Preting win Omer Applicaton Software Overview of ne Preter Driver oe gees Base Gade gt Canon U Preter Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon LJ printer diver is software thal is installed on your computer for printing data on this machine The Canon LJ printer driver converts the print data created Dy your Windows application into data that your printer Can understand and sends the converted dala to Me printer Because Afferent modets support ferent print data formats you need a Canon U printer driver for the Specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the diver setting ems through the printing preferences screen of the Canon U preter driver To view all Gescripsions of a tab Cack the Help Dutton on each tad A dalog Dox opens Asplaying a description of each Hem on the ta gt You can atso click the link found in the description of an tem to display a description of the linked Balog Don To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to leam about and then click What s This Alternatively when the BEAS Help button is found at the night end of he Stie bar click that tuzon and then click he fem you want to learn about A Gescription of the item is displayed When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on screen manual the
140. side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected images 6 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 158 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Red Eye Correction Function A061 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash You can perform the Red Eye Correction function either automatically or manually EB Note Photo Print allows you to automatical
141. tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Index Page 207 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 208 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print A078 amp Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print You can print a variety of ID photos P important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use For details contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo To print ID photos select 4 x6 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select a layout of the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select Me layout you watt to pret Check the Preview and cick the Prnt barian Printing starts SH amp SBnaerie The number of frames per page varies depending on the size of the ID photo to create Check the number of frames in the layouts displayed in the Layout Print screen then specify the number of copies in the Select Images screen You can select tw
142. text written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to Notepad Combine multiple text conversion results When scanning multiple documents select the checkbox to collect the conversion results text into one file When the checkbox is selected you can scan up to 99 pages at one time Deselect the checkbox to display each conversion result text in a separate file When the checkbox is not selected you can scan up to 10 pages at one time Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC Page 484 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC S707 Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC On the Scanner Button Settings tab you can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine Evert Seiect Eyert mese oo y Oocumert Tyge to Sean Actons Scan Settings 0 Ato X Ato v f Spocty Saree Settings D Asomatcaly save the mage to your computer ser scanning 8 Fie Nome ING Semne Fo J Saven TNUrers UserName Pitures MP Navigate Browse F Sawe to a Subfoider wth Qurert Date D Qpen te save ddog box after scanning the mage Event e Select Event Save to PC is set e Document Type Auto Scan is set Actions Scan Settings e Document Si
143. the Page Layout list 4 Specify the side to be stapled The machine analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple Side When you want to change the setting select another value from the list 5 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Duplex Printing Page 265 of 707 pages 6 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper After one side is printed reload the paper correctly according to the message Then click OK to print the opposite side P important When a media type other than Plain Paper is selected from Media Type Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable When Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable Note If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing perform Bottom Plate Cleaning in the Maintenance tab Related Topic Cleaning Inside the Machine Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Stamp Background Printing Page 266 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing P40
144. the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method P011 Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the print quality Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab and click Set Pian Paper Leter 85 11 215 2279 4eem L Preview betore parting patos Ota Cox coca toe rete The Custom dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 282 of 707 pages Quaity 4 3 2 amii 9 a a Fast Fine 3 Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK ES Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones When you select Auto the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to exp
145. the Scan Import window to scan photos and documents 82 _ Freteemees 2 a By Ome a gt C Uite scarre dver Clear Sre Save a0 POF fe View amp Use Window Use the View amp Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images 88 __ Preerences_ 2 Ja a j Catone Edt Custo Categories Juno to Man Meru J P gt Caled erime Pictures MP Mawigatee DAMLA 0 AIO jeg Selected 0 Note See File Formats for data formats extensions supported by MP Navigator EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Let s Try Scanning Page 344 of 707 pages AJAn iret Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning 100 MP Navigator EX Let s Try Scanning Try scanning using MP Navigator EX e Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX e Scanning with a simple operation Easy Scanning with Auto Scan e Scanning documents photos magazines etc from the Platen gt Scanning Photos and Documents e Scanning two or more photos small documents at one time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning images larger than the Platen Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Scanning easily according to purpose scan and save attach to e mail etc m Easy Scanning with One click Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Man
146. the margin width and then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Stapling Margin Page 248 of 707 pages Note The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width P important Staple Side and Specify Margin appear grayed out and are unavailable when Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout Scaled is selected for Page Layout When Duplex Printing is also selected only Staple Side can be specified Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Execute Borderless Printing Page 249 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Execute Borderless Printing P003 Execute Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper Without the borderless printing function a margin is provided around the printed data When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it set borderless printing The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quic
147. the operation screen of Photo Print will appear EA Note In addition to photo printing functions for creating albums calendars and other photo items are available For details on operations and functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX see Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Various Software Applications Page 35 of 707 pages m Easy WebPrint EX When Easy WebPrint EX is installed it adds a toolbar to your Internet Explorer screen The toolbar is available whenever Internet Explorer is running Wasomi bemver Epicor cients ae Teer siye Tore Gr ES Note Installing Easy WebPrint EX If Easy WebPrint EX is not installed the guidance for installation of Easy WebPrint EX may appear in the notification area of the taskbar To install Easy WebPrint EX click the displayed guidance and follow the instructions on the screen You can also install Easy WebPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM To install Easy WebPrint EX select Easy WebPrint EX in Custom Install To install Easy WebPrint EX on your computer Internet Explorer 7 or later is required and the computer must be connected to the Internet A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Paper Originals Page 36 of 707 pages Basic Guide E w Contents gt Loading Paper Originals Loading Paper Originals This section describes types of paper or originals you can load ho
148. the paper to be used Then click OK 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified paper size Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Page 279 of 707 pages Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 280 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome s gt Specifying Color Correction s gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles s gt Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast s gt Simulating an Illustration gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration s gt Reducing Photo Noise Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 281 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing
149. the printer and application software usage information will be displayed one month three months and then six months after the installation After that it will be displayed every six months for about four years Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below Thank you for your cooperation in Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program dJ For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be colected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Internet Information related to Canon inkjet printer scanner fax OS version language and display setting information Device driver and application software usage logs Information related to Canon inkjet printer fax Printer s ID number Installation date and time Ink use information Number of sheets printed and Maintenance information In this survey we wil not collect or send any information about your computer other than that above or any of your personal information For this reason from the information that is sent to us we are unable to identify specific customers 2 Wie ora tharafnra unshle tn rannd tn rannacte tr dierince anu rnlartad infnermatinn If you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot disclose any colected information cick Agree Otherwise cick Do not agree If you wish to uninstall this program
150. the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast and moving it to the left decreases the contrast You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Contrast After adjusting each color click OK z ABCDEF ab 1234567 bros Nomai Sample Type Standard View Color Porton P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image is printed with the adjusted contrast Related Topics gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 301 of 707 pages Page top Simulating an Illustration Page 302 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Im
151. this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist This function may not work properly depending on the document language Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images e Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist e Defaults Restore the default settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 462 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box Page 463 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Naviga
152. this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One click Mode Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults Scan Scans and saves documents as PDF files with the specified settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 469 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save as PDF file Dialog Box S730 Save as PDF file Dialog Box The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from the PDF dialog box of the One click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image In the Save as PDF file dialog box you can make settings for saving images to a computer Y Save the mage to the spectied folder as a PDE file Save as type POF Gt E Smas Password securty settings You can eave each image os a POF fle IMG __Retate heft 90 Rotate Rtg 0 Drag the mage to rearrange the fies Sle name mG Save in CA Users seNe Pictures MP Navigator EX 2010_0 Browse 7 Save to a Subloider wth Gurert Date seve Cancel P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal
153. to One click Mode The One click Mode screen appears One click Mode Screen e Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box aia Opens this guide P important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save dialog box or Custom dialog box When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data specify Document Type do not select Auto Mode Related Topic Easy Scanning with One click Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Page 412 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window S744 Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Select Scan Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Auto Scan or click Auto Scan in the Scan Import window to open the Auto Scan screen Scan Import window Open this window when you want to scan documents by automatically detecting the document type EF Potences E oea 3 Save ot PDF fe Jumo to Man Meru 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2
154. type settings Printer driver Matte Photo Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray 10 sheets for A4 Letter 8 5 x 11 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm and 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 20 sheets for 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm Paper Output Tray load limit We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration 1 This paper can be used for making copies when selecting the media type with the Paper button on the Operation Panel You can only select A4 or Letter sized photo paper and 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper Note When loading paper in stacks the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly In this case load one sheet at a time except for Matte Photo Paper lt MP 1015 For printing business documents e High Resolution Paper lt HR 101N gt Media type settings Printer driver High Resolution Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray 80 sheets Paper Output Tray load limit 50 sheets For creating your own prints e T Shirt Transfers lt TR 301 gt Media type settings Printer driver T Shirt Transfers e Photo Stickers lt PS 101 gt Media type settings Printer driver Glossy Photo Paper Paper load limit Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Can Use Rear Tray 1 sheet Paper Output Tray load limit We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet
155. with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Mail Dialog Box Page 472 of 707 pages e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen e Specify Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Save Settings e File Size Select a size from Small fits in a 640 by 480 window Medium fits in a 800 by 600 window Large fits in a 1024 by 768 window and Original e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif PDF or PDF Multiple Pages P important You cannot set passwords for PDF files You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White e Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF or PDF Multiple Pages Make advanced settings for creating PDF f
156. x 768 pixels etc Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 527 of 707 pages Select an output size in pixels A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio e Add Deleie Opens the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box in which you can specify custom output sizes You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display Add Delete the Output Sze E3 Outa Sire Name Output Sire Ust New Setting width 6 00 Height 4 00 ue des In the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected along with the predefined items Add To add a size enter Output Size Name Width and Height then click Add For Unit you can select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image display The name of the added size appears in Output Size List Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List Delete To delete an item select it in Output Size List and click Delete Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List P important You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels EA Note Save up to 10
157. you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page These settings can be used in combination with Normal size Borderless Fit to Page Scaled Page Layout and Duplex Printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Stapling Margin Page 247 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Stapling Margin P002 Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best staple position When you want to change the setting select from the list x J DR ak Senp E Man 5A Page So 4d Efecte A Mantenance El Page Sze Leter 85x117 El amp Onertaton A Pora A Langrcepe Rotse 180 degrees a f Same os Page Size Page Layout Noenalsize a E S 8 Pian Paper Leter 85 11 21521279 4m Nomalsize Bordetess FatoPage Scaled Page Layout g Gd 0O V Aatoenatically seduce large documert that the perter carrot output 3 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set
158. your machine s name is selected in Printer 2 Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Paper Size and Media Type Here we select 4 x6 10x15cm in Paper Size and the type of the loaded photo paper in Media Type E8 Note f you select the wrong media type the machine may not print with the proper print quality 3 Click Layout Print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 25 of 707 pages Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 26 of 707 pages 3 2 5 Select a layout and start printing 1 Select the layout of the photo Here we select Borderless full The preview will appear in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result E8 Note You can change the direction of photo or crop photos to print For details on the operation refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click Print OSS een CE EA Note To cancel a print job in progress press the Stop Reset button on the machine or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor To display the printer status monitor click the printer icon on the taskbar In Windows Vista or Windows XP click Canon XXX Printer where XXX is your machine s name on the taskbar O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 27 of 707 pages bie Guide E a Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Photos
159. 1 Is the POWER lamp off Check if the POWER lamp is lit green The FINE Cartridge Holder will not move unless the power is on If the POWER lamp is off close the Scanning Unit Cover and turn the machine on While the POWER lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit green and then open the Scanning Unit Cover again e Check 2 Is an error code displayed on the LED Close the Scanning Unit Cover confirm the error code is displayed take the appropriate action to resolve the error and then reopen it For details on how to resolve the error see An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED e Check 3 Has the Scanning Unit Cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer If the Scanning Unit Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the FINE Cartridge Holder moves to the right to prevent the Print Head from drying out Close and reopen the Scanning Unit Cover to return the FINE Cartridge Holder to the position for replacing e Check 4 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period Close the Scanning Unit Cover wait a while then reopen it If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time the FINE Cartridge Holder may not move to the position for replacing since the Print Head may overheat EA Note Opening the Scanning Unit Cover while printing moves the FINE Cartridge Holder to the right Close the Scanning Unit Cover a
160. 1 or C4 Photo Print Settings Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 80 of 707 pages Setting the Stapling Margin Execute Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Mon
161. 2 Ejsa Document Sae Fedo Detect Mute Documert Reschtion P Wai _Seectr__ C Ute the scarce diver Cleor Seloctions H Sre Jump to Man Meru re 2 Inthe Save as PDF file dialog box specify the save settings Specify the file type file name and destination folder Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save the mage to the peched tolder as a PDE fie POF OAR Paves ooo D Bassword securty settings You can save muttple mages to one PDF file Chlas Usertarre Picnres MP Navigator X 2910_0 WI Save to a Sublolder wth Curent Date Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving as PDF Files Page 385 of 707 pages EE Note By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder You can set passwords for PDF files s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files 3 Click Save Scanned images are saved according to the settings To further use edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box s gt Creating Editing PDF Files s gt Printing Documents s Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Editing PDF Files Page 386 of 707 pages Advanced Guide
162. 232415 26 27 78 2930 WA Swap Left amp Right Swaps the left and right halves P important This function is not available while the image is enlarged reduced e Rotate 180 Rotates right half of the image 180 degrees Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 361 of 707 pages P important This function is not available while the image is enlarged reduced Q Enlarge Enlarges the displayed image g Reduce Reduces the displayed image e Full screen Displays the entire image E8 Note Enlarge Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image When the document is scanned upside down the image displayed in the Stitch assist window will also be upside down Click Rotate 180 to rotate the image to the correct orientation You can drag the right half of the image from right to left or up and down to adjust the position If the left and right halves do not match due to a slanted document place the document correctly and click Back then scan again 11 Click Next 12 Drag the mouse to specify the area to be saved then click OK ox Acasa tt ma ry O Generates the maga of the copong wes a ual Bae a P SSE The combined image is created When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box opens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next document or select Exit to end
163. 3 Stamp Background Printing Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data It also allows you to print date time and user name The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data The procedure for performing stamp background printing is as follows Printing a Stamp CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre registered 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab PR ack Setup S Man SA Page Setur of Efecte Af Martensnce El Pope Sue Letter 8 5511 Ei a Onertation A Pora A Landreoe F Rotate 180 degrees a ol Same as Page Size J Page Layout Nomalsine oe a Bas a c m V Atonatcaly seduce large documert that the perter carrot atot Duges Porting Sapo Sde Lengade sapling et Sprcty Maran Copes 1 gt 0333 i E Port tom Last Page Collate Cox canon too te The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens Refine Stamp Pisce stano over ted Stamp first page only Background fra page only Cox comi Domas _ tio ES Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Stamp Background Printing Page 267 of 707 pages With the
164. 4 A 4 r A A 4 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A rA P important P important The portion within 0 039 inches 1 mm inwards from the alignment mark cannot be Large documents such as A4 size photos Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Placing Documents Page 334 of 707 pages scanned that cannot be placed away from the edges A arrow alignment mark of the Platen may be saved as PDF files To save in a format other than PDF scan by specifying the file format A 0 039 inches 1 mm Placing Multiple Documents Allow 0 39 inches 1 cm or more space between the edges diagonally striped area of the Platen and documents and between documents Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned A more than 0 39 inches 1 cm E8 Note m You can place up to 12 documents Positions of slanted documents 10 degrees or less are corrected automatically Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 335 of 707 pages Weblpigiesel titel Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Appendix Various Scan Settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Forwarding Scanne
165. 401 MP Navigator EX Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct enhance scanned images automatically 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct enhance ES Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Edit Convert then click Fix photo images on the list O My bce D QD Ote a B Q Categories 3 Q Prete Q Portrait Q Othe gt ror Pant gt Send P Edil Convest Covert b tent Me Selections E Jumo to Man Meru Ctre herhan Pictare WD Navigate DAMO D MOL jeg The Correct Enhance Images window opens ES Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box In that case only the target image outlined in orange can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 3 Select the image you want to correct enhance from the thumbnail list The selected image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals gt Cek 1o elect the image ET Prtecence Z Ba H G al zoan A G a SB ane Cove Ab Ai Categoce Ede C
166. 450 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt One click Mode Screen S701 MP Navigator EX One click Mode Screen Click __ Switch Mode at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One click Mode screen You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon ocr Custos e ff Preferences I e Auto Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type File format is automatically set Files are saved to a computer When you click this icon the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings Auto Scan Dialog Box e Save Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer The document type can be detected automatically When you click this icon the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen e PDF Scan documents and save them as PDF files When you click this icon the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings PDF Dialog Box e Mail Scan documents or photos and attach them to e mail When you click this icon the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and e mail software program settings Mail Dialog Box e OCR Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it
167. 5 x 11 Letter Note When you switch the page size to A4 or 8 5 x 11 Letter load paper of the selected size regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel When the page size is set to A4 load A4 plain paper or photo paper When the page size is set to 8 5 x 11 Letter load Letter sized plain paper or photo paper O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Photos Page 16 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Copying gt Copying Photos C023 Copying Photos This section describes the procedure to copy a printed photo on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper You need to prepare Printed photos Photo paper for printing See Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare for copying a photo 1 Turn on the power See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Load a photo on the Platen Glass See Loading Originals 2 Start copying 1 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies See step 2 in Copying Documents 2 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type The Paper lamp indicates the selected page size and media type Here we select 10 x 15 cm or 4 x 6 Photo Paper E8 Note You can select the following page sizes and media type
168. 6 mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm ye 1 23 in 31 2 mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm t ri J i i 0 25 in 6 4mm 0 25 in 6 3 mm 1 28 in 32 5 mm HB Recommended printing area E Printable area Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Envelopes Page 680 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Envelopes U505 Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area width x height European DL 4 06 x 7 07 inches 103 2 x 179 5 mm US Comm Env 10 3 86 x 7 91 inches 98 0 x 200 8 mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer Jeu 0 32 in 8 0 mm I y 1 28 in 32 5 mm o 0 13in 3 4mm 0 13in 34mm i la E Recommended printing area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top How to Detach Attach the Document Cover Page 681 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt How to Detach Attach the Document Cover U514 How to Detach Attach the Document Cover e Detaching the Document Cover Hold up the Document Cover vertically e Attaching the Document Cover As illustrated below insert both hinges A of the Document Cover vertically into the holder B until they stop to attach the Document Cover Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing the Print Document or Reprinting
169. Advanced Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 153 of 707 pages 3 Click Print Ee Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 154 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos A060 Easy PhotoPrint EX Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images Click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct Enhance Images window P important For Photo Print if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box you cannot correct enhance images E Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window Auto Photo Fix This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash Using the Red Eye Correction Function Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background s gt Using the Face Brightener Function Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus fa
170. Canon MP280 series On screen Manual How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Basic Guide Describes the summary of this product 4 E MP280 series On screen Manual MC 4700 V1 00 SEA ae n Taea eS Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes the detailed function of this product Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 1 of 707 pages MP280 series Basic Guide Page 2 of 707 pages Canon MP280 series e e WHow to Use This Manual Basic Guide WPrinting This Manual MP 4500 V1 00 a WlAdvanced Guide F Contents gt Overview of the Machine gt Loading Paper Originals Main Components Loading Paper LED Display and Basic Operations Loading Originals Copying gt Routine Maintenance Copying Documents When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Copying Photos Incorrect Fit to Page Copying Replacing a FINE Cartridge Cleaning the Machine Scanning gt Appendix Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images gt Printing from Your Computer Tips on How to Use Your Machine Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Starting Various Software Applications Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Overview of the Machine Page 3 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Overview of the Machine Overview of the Machine This section shows the component name
171. Communication Error e Check 1 If the POWER lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the machine on While the POWER lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the POWER Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 642 of 707 pages lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver In the following instructions XXX signifies your machine s name 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Select Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes 3 Right click the Canon XXX Printer icon then select Printer properties In Windows Vista or Windows XP right click the Canon XXX Printer icon where XXX is your machine s name then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX Printer appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s e If the setting is incorrect Reinstall the MP Drivers e Printing does not start even though the port named USBnnn is selected Launch Canon My Printer from the task tr
172. Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes E E 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window opens P important Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties Windows 7 or Properties Windows Vista or Windows XP displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software About tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Page 696 of 707 pages AJni Gutels Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord U516 Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord To unplug the power cord follow the procedure below P important When you unplug the power cord press the ON button then confirm that the POWER lamp is off Unplugging the power cord while the machine is still on may cause drying or clogging of the Print Head and print quality may be reduced 1 Press the ON button to turn the machine off 2 Confirm that the POWER lamp is off odo 3 Un
173. Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Maintenance Tab Page 317 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt Maintenance Tab P410 Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the machine ai Canon MP280 series Printer Printing Preferences O W TH ack Senp E Mon Bi Page Setup of tects Ad Martensnce Cesning Bottom Piste Gearing lt gt Biminates urmarted smudges and ines n Prevents paper smudges during parting he pert resut Deep Geaning e Unciogs noses tu carnet be ceard Cnt prt le dr whe by regda Gearing Part Head Aignmert wi Exncutes pert head algrmert 19 corect a Peo pisarek Da mesabgrmert of cols and ines Nozzle Check Quet Mode E Ports a patem to check whether the part E Allows you to reduce the operating nose heod norges ore cogged ioe right or siert stustors Tik Canndge Settings g Specfies the ink catndge for printing p eee EA pantona Vew Porter Satus Aot Co ca too Coo Features s gt Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position s gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used Managing the Machine Power Relate
174. Drivers You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows 1 Turn off the machine 2 Start the installer Double click the icon of the downloaded file The installation program starts P important In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when starting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Yes or Continue Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning 3 Install the MP Drivers At the Welcome window click Next When the License Agreement window is displayed check the contents and click Yes If you do not agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement you cannot install this software Installation of the MP Drivers begins After the Installation Complete window is displayed check that the machine and the computer are connected through a cable To select the connection port for your machine manually check the Select printer port check box and click Manual Selection At the Select Port window select the connection destination and then click OK 4 Complete the inst
175. Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX C052 m Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos Stickers Layout Print Creating Still Images from Videos You can capture video frames and create still images O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Page 28 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Documents C053 Printing Documents This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide E8 Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows 7 operating system Home Premium hereafter referred to as Windows 7 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load A4 plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software applica
176. Eluse the same mage n al frames 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames ES Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the frames on the page Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 138 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting a Photo A053 SS Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select roges for stickers You Can abo add replace rrapes ater in the eating orocess To comet or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button AOON Corrections and enhancements N the resuming screen ag 7 alg a A E Soroa a EE eto a amp TEE 1 Coroner E Network amp Rab es IMG0012_sJ09 1NG000S_s Jo9 D4G0002_sj09 w 4 wp Ci Insde Pages 0 erage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image
177. Follow the procedure below to scan photos or documents mode C Ute the scarves diver Speci 5 Click Specify Select Auto Detect Multiple Documents for Document Size amp 2 sa G a E o a Piece Documosts Open the document cover and place the photo or Ocumare onthe platen Qe Select Docesent Typo Saren of phota documert bom Documert Click Scan Scanning datz When setting is completed click OK Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents gt Speaty advanced settings for scanning photoa and docuererts Document Tyre Color Photo 6 Click Scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals a Page 354 of 707 pages Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 355 of 707 pages GQ eee ET Forteco 2 ATENE s a CCO Prace Documests PhetonDocuments Ptaton Open the document cover and place the photo or D pa Gumer onthe platen uh Color Prono Qe Select Docesent Typo Document f AdoD F D _ ee of phota documert bom Documert Rescktion ae Ode Sow Use the scarves diver Click Scan Scanning tatz Jumo to Man Mere Multiple documents are scanned at one time EA Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box opens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next document or select Exit to end The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window ae Conca MP
178. Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents It is suitable even for beginners P important MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine In that case restart the computer Use the default display font size of the OS Otherwise software screens may not appear correctly What You Can Do with This Software This software allows you to scan multiple documents at one time or scan images larger than the Platen You can also save scanned images attach them to e mail or print them using the supplied applications Screens There are two types of MP Navigator EX Main Menu Navigation Mode screen and One click Mode screen Navigation Mode Screen You can start various tasks from the Navigation Mode screen including simple scanning scanning using ScanGear scanner driver and enhancing correcting images Scan Import Documents or Images Auto Scan Photos Documents Platen e Show tit window af that HT Proterences One click Mode Screen You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the One click Mode screen a Q VY amp ocr Custors Ciam ft Preferences Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software Page 343 of 707 pages Scan Import Window Use
179. Is the appropriate type of paper used Check the followings e Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose s gt Loading Paper Originals e When performing Borderless Printing make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless Printing If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing the print quality may be reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper s Printing Area e Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl e For Plain Paper Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side Leaving the paper loaded on the Rear Tray for a long time may cause the paper to curl In this case load the paper with the other side facing up It may resolve the problem We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface For Other Paper If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0 1 inch 3 mm A in height the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly In such cases follow the procedure described below to correct the paper curl Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 623 of 707 pages 4 A 1 Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below a a 2 Check that the paper is now flat We recommend printing curl corrected paper one sheet at a time ES Note Depending on the media typ
180. ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Page 654 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time S907 Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen Placing Documents Check 2 Scan each item individually Some applications do not support multiple image scanning Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Page 655 of 707 pages AJE Gilets Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode 916 Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen gt Placing Documents Check 2 Multiple image scanning may not be supported Some applications do not support multiple image scanning In that case scan each item individually Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Slow Scanning Speed Page 656 of 707 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Slow Scanning Speed S908 Slow Scanning Speed Check 1 To view the image on a monitor set the output resolution to around 150 dpi To print set it to around 300 dpi gt Resolution Check 2 Set Fading Correction Grain Correction etc to None
181. ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page 401 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files S509 Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Enter a password to open or edit print password protected PDF files Password entry method varies by operation The following procedures are examples only P important You can open edit or print only PDF files whose passwords were set with MP Navigator EX You cannot edit PDF files edited in other applications or whose passwords were set with other applications Only MP Navigator EX version 1 1 and 2 0 or later supports opening editing and printing password protected PDF files Passwords are case sensitive You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX Entering a Password to Open a File G 1 In the View amp Use window select the PDF file you want to open and click Zoom in Alternatively double click the PDF file Chek to eect the image 8T __ Pretecences a Bo H Pjan a G a j E Carpe Oore Al Ad Crogooe Edt Curtor Cotegones Hy Bos Scosnedfapeiod Imager Seecity Foise v Documere lagen eketet Recently Saved image v POF Fie Sper Saated oN 8 Document Q Buniness Card Q Posteard Q Standard Size P
182. Mode is selected the document type is automatically detected In that case Color Mode Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well P important Document types supported by Auto Mode are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode In that case specify the document type or size A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents ES Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 456 of 707 pages To reduce moire set Document Type to Magazine e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Custom Size Setting Wah BSO inches 1 008 50 Height 11 00 inches 1 00 11 69 me P important When you select Aut
183. Not Work Page 648 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scanner Does Not Work S902 Scanner Does Not Work Check 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer Check 4 Restart the computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Page 649 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start S903 ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Check 1 Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed If it is not installed insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers Check 2 On the File menu of the application select Select Source and select the machine P important Do not select the model name that includes WIA in it E Note The operation may differ depending on the application Check 3 Start from a TWAIN compliant application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Page 650 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Error Message Appears and the Sc
184. Note To delete a document from List of My Manual select that document title from the list and then click Delete or press Delete key Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Symbols Used in This Document Page 97 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Caution Instructions that if ignored could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation gt Important Instructions including important information Be sure to read these indications E8 Note Instructions include notes for operation and additional explanations Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Trademarks and Licenses Page 98 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Trademarks and Licenses Trademarks and Licenses e Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Internet
185. Nygere E s elsz paani 3T Postens 2 7 RA wy E yoe a 5 ER Color Prono Document Sae Aaso Detect Mugio Documerts Reschtior Ode __ Speci O Use the rearea diver Jumo to Man Meru 7 Edit the scanned images as required Use Edit Tools to rotate images select a part of an image etc See the Edit Tools in Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window for details ES Note First select images to edit Selected images are outlined in orange Drag the mouse or use Shift arrow keys to select multiple images You can also select images by dragging and dropping them into the Selected Images area 8 Save the scanned images s gt Saving Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 356 of 707 pages s gt Saving as PDF Files EA Note f you want to preview the images before scanning use ScanGear s gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 357 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist S106 MP Navigator EX Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right h
186. O J atonacahy reduce large documert that the perter caret otat Oupieg Parting amp apie Sde Legad ein at gt Spncty Maran Q aap 1 gt 033 i El Port iom Last Page Collate ses 0K kna toe Hee Refine Samo nd Ord pace ork Background fit page ony Coo cc C oats Hel ES Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 273 of 707 pages and Background cannot be used 3 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens Background Settings Not Saved Eaz Background Save settings Fig Sect Fle Layout Method Fil page EE Ftensty Oo o Oefouts 4 Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File Select the target bitmap file bmp and then click Open 5 Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed When Custom is selected you can set coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window Intensity Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider To lighten the background move the slider to the left To darken the background move the slider to
187. O jeg 4 Select the images you want to use then select what you want to do with them See the corresponding sections below for details on using images s gt Creating Editing PDF Files gt Printing Documents s Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with Other Application Software Page 491 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software Scanning with Other Application Software s gt What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver s gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver s gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 492 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver S201 What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver ScanGear scanner driver is software required for scanning documents It enables you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN ScanGear is a TWAIN compatible driver What You Can Do with
188. OF Fite 9 SA mN a e aae Jumo to Man Meru 4 CAUvert Userhame Picbares MD Navigator DAME 0 ANIMS NEN pot EA Note Only the Document Open Password will be required The Permissions Password will not be required If the Zoom in dialog box with a lock icon opens click Enter Password Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files AON SS 1MG_NEW pe iz protected Phonic antes a cumari open powi Fie Name DG_NEW ot Cate viene Sre 37 Locaton Coors serene Poren MP Navigator DA Seasty Category POF Fle IZ Selecta this mage umber of copes 1 Sock Get ING NEW pat is protected Please enter a document open password A O Cancel to cancel the process Erter Password The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box Note To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box re enter the password Entering a Password Permissions Password to Edit or Print a File 1 Inthe View amp Use window select PDF files and click PDF or Print as tH Ee wan O GoreAt O AlCategce e Y Doumer Imager elected Y POF Fie maya Saated Bims Jumo to Man Meru C Urerd Uherhame Picbares MO Navigatee DAMELO 01 ONIS 0002_NEW pdf Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 402 of 707 pages Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page 403 of 707 pages 2 To create a PDF file o
189. OK The Canon lJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing 4 Editing print documents and print pages e Combining print documents You can combine multiple print documents to form a single document To select multiple print documents hold down the Ctrl key and click the documents to be merged or hold down the Shift key and press the upper arrow or lower arrow key By combining print documents you can prevent blank pages from being inserted when you execute duplex printing or page layout printing From the Document Name list select the documents to be combined On the Edit menu select Combine Documents from Documents to combine the documents in the listed sequence When you combine documents the documents selected before the combining are deleted from the list and the combined document is added to the list e Changing the sequence of print documents or print pages e To change the sequence of the print documents go to the Document Name list and select the print document to be moved Next on the Edit menu select Move Document from Documents and select the appropriate item e To change the sequence of the print pages click View Thumbnails from the Option menu and select the print page to be moved Next on the Edit menu select Move Page from Pages and select the appropriate item e Deleting print documents and print pages e To delete a print document select the target document from the Docu
190. Photos Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX How to Use This Manual Selecting a Photo Printing This Manual Selecting the Paper Creating an Album Changing the Machine Settings Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting a Photo When you display this on screen manual in a language Editing environment other than English Printing some English descriptions may Printing Calendars be displayed Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Stickers Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Layout Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Face Brightener Function Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 79 of 707 pages Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjusting Images Correct Enhance Images Window Creating Still Images from Videos Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins What Is C
191. SAMP 1 MID Browse Elala Sound When Scanning is Completed Calibration Settings Eeoae at Every Scan OFF X Scanner Tab Allows you to specify a folder to save images temporarily and a music file to play during or at the end of a scan s gt Scanner Tab Preview Tab Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear is started and how to display cropping frames after previewing images You can also select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents gt Preview Tab Scan Tab Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear after scanning images Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Allows you to select how to adjust color and specify the monitor gamma value s gt Color Settings Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Tab Page 553 of 707 pages Anad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Scanner Tab 812 Scanner Tab On the Scanner tab you can specify the following settings es Scanner Preview Scan _ Color Settings F Qet Mode Select Folder Where Temporary Fies are Saved C Waers LserNarme Apts Torpi Bronte Sound Settings El Play Music During Scanning C Wires Media CSSAMP 1 MID Ptay Sound When Scanning is Completed Calibration Settings Execute at Every Scan l OFF ay e Quiet Mode Select this checkbox to reduce scan
192. Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images The file format of adjusted images is JPEG Exif 7 Click Exit P important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Searching Images Page 375 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Searching Images S407 MP Navigator EX Searching Images In the View amp Use window of the Navigation Mode screen you can search images saved on your computer and open them in MP Navigator EX Opened images can be printed edited etc myn o i t E j ick to select the imaga 0T Poteca 2 amga o ee Come At Ai Cotegnee Edt Custom Categones My Box Scanned Impoxted Imager v Photo eas Saats aee fo Seach ix Bl EO by Box Searned impated images File Hone Aone ome A wird r phvaoe inthe fie vO Crey Unclasafied O Modied te Oops wD Shoto Dae Vv nD TAE v Mose Adtranced Options A wd u peye n te te E Et efomaton E POF test C Cote serative O Mach al esteia Machay etms Selections H R Jumoto Man Meru 4 C Unerd Uierhlame Dictures Navigator DAMLI 01 ANO jeg Note Search images in My Box Scanned Imported Images Recently Saved Images or a sel
193. Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos A088 Gs Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images Faj Select the image you want to print the date on in the Edit screen and click a Edit Image or double click the image Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Postion amp Sze Crop Frame Date Comments F Show date Text Orientation AG Landscape ez Portret Postion Fort Size Select the Show date checkbox Set the Text Orientation Position Font Size and Color then click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed images Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Dates on Photos Page 230 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Attaching Comments to Photos Page 231 of 707 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Attaching Comments to Photos A089 ri Eorna Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album The photo name shooting date and com
194. This section describes the procedure to print documents or photos with a computer You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Starting Various Software Applications Solution Menu EX Easy WebPrint EX A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 24 of 707 pages Basic Guide Advanced Guide Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX C051 Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper For details on Easy PhotoPrint EX refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide E8 Note Install Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Easy PhotoPrint EX select Easy PhotoPrint EX in Custom Install 1 Prepare for printing 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension
195. U349 Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Remove the paper following the procedure below 1 Slowly pull the paper out either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot whichever is easier E8 Note Ifthe paper tears and a piece remains inside the machine turn the machine off open the Scanning Unit Cover and remove the paper Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine After removing all paper close the Scanning Unit Cover and turn the machine back on If you cannot pull the paper out turn the machine off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 2 Reload the paper and press the Stop Reset button on the machine If you turned off the machine in step 1 all print jobs in the queue are canceled Reprint if necessary EA Note When reloading the paper confirm that you are using the paper suited for printing and are loading it correctly Loading Paper Originals We recommend you use paper other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or graphics otherwise the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page 639 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals In Other Cases Page 640 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshootin
196. Used Settings then select the Rotate 180 degrees check box in Additional Features For details on the printer driver settings see Printing Documents O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Can Use Page 43 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Can Use C075 m Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing for the best print results Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos Media Types Commercially available papers e Plain Paper including recycled paper Media type settings Printer driver Plain Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray Approx 100 sheets Paper Output Tray load limit Approx 50 sheets ES Note Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature or humidity In such cases reduce the number of paper you load at a time to less than half 100 recycled paper can be used This paper can be used for making copies when selecting the media type with the Paper button on the Operation Panel You can only select A4 or Letter sized plain paper e Envelopes Media type settings Printer driver
197. You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab series e DR Ouk Setup lt gt Man 2 Pace Setup gf Efecte Aj Martenance El Page Sze Letter 3 511 amp Onentation Aj Pora A Langcape Rotte 180 degrees B Sane os Page Size a E U 3 a Pian Paper Leter 85 11 215 2279 dem Nomalsize Bordetess Fttofape Page Layout g Gd Im Ji Atoesatically seduce large documert that the perter carrat otat 1 Duplex Parting Sacie Sde Lerg sde seacing et Specty Magn Copes gt 0 333 Z treten an ren alato Pact Options Qamp Bacigeund Oetauts CEK Eia oy __ Hele 3 Set Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation ES Note If Normal size is selected for Page Layout then Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output is displayed Normally you can leave the Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output check box checked During printing if you do not want to reduce large documents that cannot be printed on the printer uncheck t
198. a press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator gt Sharing from the displayed File menu e f you are using Windows XP select Sharing from the File menu P important In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when starting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Yes or Continue Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning ES Note Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use the Network Setup Wizard to set up sharing When this message appears choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing 4 Set sharing Select Share this printer on the Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary and click OK The setup on the print server system is complete Next set up the client systems O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Settings on Client PC Page 699 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Client PC P044 Settings on Client PC After setting up the print server system set up the client system The procedure for setting up the cl
199. aded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Classifying Images into Categories Page 378 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Classifying Images into Categories S403 MP Navigator EX Classifying Images into Categories Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category You can classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically and also create custom categories You can drag and drop an image to move it from one category to another ES Note If you have classified the images in MP Navigator EX 2 0 or later and then upgrade MP Navigator EX to the latest version the classification information on the second latest version is transferred upon initial startup After the initial startup the classification information cannot be transferred 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen EA Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 In Categories 7 Sort by select Categories Images are automatically sorted by category and appear in the Thumbnail window Cc 1o elect the imaga H H F aan Oore AL 44 Coge Sporty Folder v Po mais Saotes v Pora lmeptad Selected 4 Elorg v Others ha
200. age Data gt Simulating an Illustration P021 Simulating an Illustration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used With the Simulate Illustration function you can print full color or 256 color image data so that it looks like a hand drawn illustration This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the Simulate Illustration If necessary check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab and adjust the Contrast Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the image data The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver ail rage Opterizer Prgte Opts PRO Foply Throughout Page E Photo Noise Reductor Pian Paper Leter 8 5 11 215 9 279 4em 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed so that it looks hand drawn Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 303 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color P022 Representing Image Data with a Singl
201. ages displayed in the Selections area Exit Click to close the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window 2 Toolbar we bii Select all images Selects all the images in the page displayed in the Thumbnail window When you select an image a checkmark appears in its checkbox ES Note You can select up to 300 images au Clear all check marks Cancels all image selections in the page displayed in the Thumbnail window q b gt Back to the previous page Go to the next page Displays the previous next page 1 3 Vi S pages Page number entry box Total pages View Enter a page number and click View to display the page SS Thumbnail Size Slider Resizes the images in the Thumbnail window Move the slider to the right to enlarge and left to reduce the images 3 Thumbnail Window Displays the thumbnails miniatures of the search results images The title is displayed under each Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 193 of 707 pages thumbnail To select an image click the thumbnail or checkbox P important Due to limitations of photo sharing sites if the search results exceed 4 000 images the same images as those displayed in the page containing the 4 001st image will be displayed in all the subsequent pages For example when Number of Results per Page is set to 20 the images displayed in page 201 are the same as those displayed in page 202 an
202. al Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set TR aksep Man 53 Page Setup of Efecte Al Martenance Meda Type Pian Paper 4 Paper Source Rear Teny lt etractions Detauts Cox cancel __ troy _ Heo The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Specify the brightness Select Light Normal or Dark for Brightness and click OK The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness Page 297 of 707 pages ABCDEF 1234567 bots Nomai Sample Type Sandard Feeraty 0 View Cole Patter doi 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed at the specified brightness Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance s gt Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Intensity Page 298 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Inten
203. allation Click Complete Turn on the machine and wait awhile until the connection is recognized The procedure for installing the MP Drivers is complete Depending on the environment you are using a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed To complete the installation properly restart the computer P important You can download the MP Drivers for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest MP Drivers delete the previously installed version For instructions on deleting the MP Drivers see Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Related Topics gt Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers sb Before Installing the MP Drivers Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Installing the MP Drivers Page 692 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Page 693 of 707 pages Nebel gia Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals U509 Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on screen manuals from your computer Before uninstalling the on screen manuals exit all on screen manuals that are opening 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Canon XXX Manual where XXX is your machine s name gt Uninstall 2 Click OK when the confirmation message appears ES Note
204. alsPrinter com Manuals Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning U Page 667 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel S942 Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen gt Placing Documents Check 2 Check that the settings are correctly set according to the document If you cannot scan properly with Auto Scan specify the document type and size s gt Scanning Photos and Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Page 668 of 707 pages AJAA Si Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted S943 Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Check In MP Navigator EX deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned I Page 669 of 707 pages Advanced Guide
205. alves of a large document separately and combine the scanned images back into one image You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the Platen 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX E8 Note You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the One click Mode screen Stitch Assist is available from the One click Mode screen as well by changing the document size Click the corresponding icon and select Stitch Assist for Document Size Then skip ahead to Step 5 2 In Scan Import click Photos Documents Platen View amp Use Scan Import Documents or Images Auto Scan Photos Documents Platen gt E Show thir window of startup 3 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Follows the procedure below to scan photos oe documents O mw P o Piece Documests Open the document cover and place the photo or Ocumare onthe platen Qe Select Docesent Typo Saren of phota documert bom Documert C Ute the searret diver Click Scan Scanning datz Jumo to Man Mere 4 Click Specify Select Stitch Assist for Document Size then specify the scanning resolution as required When setting is completed click OK Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Docume
206. amaged or ink may leak from the machine Be sure not to use or transport the machine vertically or slanted Tip Do not place any object on the Document Cover Do not place any object on the Document Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction Also place the machine where objects will not fall on it Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 76 of 707 pages Gly gt O Tip Carefully choose the area to place the machine v Place the machine at least 5 91 inches 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps If the machine is placed closer to those it may not be able to work properly due to fluorescent noises m How to maintain the optimal printing quality The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the Print Head from drying or clogging Always follow the following steps for optimal printing quality e Follow the procedure below to disconnect the power plug 1 Press the ON button on the machine to turn it off 2 Make sure that the POWER lamp is not lit 3 Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet If you press the ON button to turn off the power the machine caps the Print Head nozzles automatically to prevent from drying If you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before the POWER lamp is turned off the Print Head will not be cap
207. an also enlarge the image by double clicking it a j PA lad oe Display Size Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window By Date a Y Sort by Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date ascending or descending Thumbnail Window e Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed When you select the checkbox of an image the image appears in the Selected Images area EA Note Thumbnails may appear as when there is not enough memory to display the images When Images are Sorted by Categories e Close All Open All You can hide or show all images in the displayed categories e Close All Hides all images e Open All Displays all images Note When you click Close All the button changes to Open All Selected Images Area o bi Cancel All Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 420 of 707 pages o ii Cancel Selection Cancels the selection of the target image outlined in orange in the Selected Images area e Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed Related Topic Scanning Photos and Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page 421 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application So
208. an specify the other ink cartridge that still has ink and continue printing The procedure for specifying the ink cartridge is as follows Ink Cartridge Settings 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Ink Cartridge Settings on the Maintenance tab The Ink Cartridge Settings dialog box appears 3 Select the ink cartridge to be used Select the ink cartridge to be used for printing and click OK The specified ink cartridge will be used from the next printing P important When the following settings are specified Black Only does not function because the machine uses the color ink cartridge to print documents e Other than Plain Paper Hagaki A Hagaki or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab e Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Do not detach an ink cartridge that is not in use Printing cannot be performed while either ink cartridge is detached Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Managing the Machine Power Page 599 of 707 pages Adna tiffs Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Managing the Machine Power P414 Managing the Machine Power This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows Power Off The Power Off function turns off the machine When you use this function you will not
209. anGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear 904 Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Check 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on Check 2 Turn off the machine then reconnect the USB cable and replug the power cord Check 3 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer Check 4 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer Check 5 Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed If it is not installed insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers Check 6 On the File menu of the application select Select Source and select the machine EA Note The operation may differ depending on the application Check 7 Make sure that the application is TWAIN compliant You cannot open ScanGear scanner driver from applications not supporting TWAIN Check 8 Exit ScanGear if it is running on another application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Page 651 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor 905 Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Check 1 Increase the scanning resolution gt Resolution Check 2 Set the scale to 100 Some appli
210. and Correcting Image Data gt Reducing Photo Noise P024 Reducing Photo Noise This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used With the Photo Noise Reduction function you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Noise Reduction Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the level 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing Photo Noise Page 311 of 707 pages E Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you Depending on application software or resolution of image data effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras image may be distorted Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Overview of the Printer Driver Page 312 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations s g
211. and the machine may not operate properly when it is reinstalled To maintain optimal printing quality use a FINE Cartridge within six months of first use E8 Note If a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink you can print with either Color or Black FINE Cartridge in whichever ink remains only for a while However the print quality may be reduced compared to when printing with both cartridges We recommend to use new FINE Cartridges in order to obtain optimum qualities Even when printing with one ink only print with leaving the empty FINE Cartridge installed If either of the Color FINE Cartridge or Black FINE Cartridge is not installed an error occurs and the machine cannot print For information on how to configure this setting refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black and white document or when black and white printing is specified Both color ink and black ink are also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the Print Head which may be necessary to maintain the machine s performance When ink runs out replace the FINE Cartridge immediately with a new one For details see Tips on How to Use Your Machine 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Paper Output Tray Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Replacing a FINE Cartridge 2 Lift the Scanning Unit Cover then hold it open with the Scanning Unit Support C The FINE Car
212. aning the Platen Glass and Document Cover U061 Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine With a clean soft lint free cloth wipe the Platen Glass A and the inner side of the Document Cover white sheet B gently Be sure not to leave any residue especially on the Platen Glass A P important The inner side of the Document Cover white sheet B is easily damaged so wipe it gently Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 580 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 581 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Aligning the Print Head gt Aligning the Print Head U096 Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position E Note If the remaining ink level is low the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low gt Routine Maintenance 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and ope
213. anning the reage rout Ed formation Sopheation Settings Open with Nene Open the view amp Use diaiow Bex E Start scanning by chcking the one chck button isoh iis far Denis The ScanGear screen appears P important Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the Auto Scan dialog box or PDF dialog box Starting from an Application Follow these steps example to start ScanGear from an application The procedure varies depending on the application For details refer to the application s manual 1 Start the application 2 On the File menu of the application select Select Source and select the machine 3 Select the command to scan a document Scan Import Acquire image etc The ScanGear screen appears Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 496 of 707 pages Scanning in Basic Mode Page 497 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning in Basic Mode S203 Scanning in Basic Mode Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on screen steps This section explains how to scan a single document See Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver to scan multiple documents at one time P important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case click A T
214. anualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 85 of 707 pages Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image If You Cannot Resolve the Problem FAQs Instructions for Use Printer Driver General Notes Scanner Driver Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Using MP Navigator EX Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How to Use This Manual Page 86 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window s gt Printing This Manual gt Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks and Licenses Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Operating the Contents Pane Page 87 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane L Cano Me 4 Back p GB Cements x My Manual A Search E Print Advanced Guide SH Canon NT
215. arpen text in a document or magazine for better readability P important When this checkbox is selected the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected These functions are not available when the Scan Settings dialog box is opened from the OCR dialog box Auto Photo Fix is not available when Color Mode is Grayscale or Black and White Auto Document Fix is not available when Color Mode is Black and White The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan e Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen e Unsharp Mask Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image e Remove gutter shadow Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets P important You cannot select this checkbox when Auto Detect Auto Detect Multiple Documents or Stitch Assist is selected for Document Size When scanning align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Pl
216. aten Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 461 of 707 pages Note Use ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set See Gutter Shadow Correction for details e Reduce Show through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show through is apparent in the scanned image e Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle within 0 1 to 10 degrees or 0 1 to 10 degrees of the document P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text Documents with extremely large or small fonts Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures images Hand written documents Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines tables Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document e Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select
217. avigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder and file name Save as PDF file Dialog Box ES Note To set passwords for PDF files select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image After scanning you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box Setting Passwords for PDF Files Application Settings Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type The specified application starts after images are scanned P important Depending on the specified application the images may not appear correctly or the application may not start Reset Cancels the application setting Set Allows you to select an application to start Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select
218. ay select Diagnose and Repair Printer Follow the on screen instructions to set the correct printer port then select Canon XXX Printer If the problem is not resolved reinstall the MP Drivers e Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the machine directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 4 Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed correctly Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive and perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers to install again e Check 5 Check the status of the device on your computer Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device 1 Click Control Panel Hardware and Sound then Device Manager If the User Account Control screen is displayed follow the on screen instructions In Windows XP click Control Panel Performance and Maintenance System then click Device Manager on the Hardware sheet 2 Double click Universal Serial Bus contr
219. be able to turn the machine on from the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab When the confirmation message appears click OK The machine power switches off and the Maintenance tab is displayed again Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing the Machine Noise Page 600 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Reducing the Machine Noise P034 Reducing the Machine Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night etc Using this function may lower the print speed The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows ssssastss s Quiet Mode 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Mode dialog box opens w Set the quiet mode If necessary specify one of the following items Do not use quiet mode The operating noise is at normal volume Always use quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise Use quiet mode within specified time The operating noise can be reduced during a specified period of time Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated P important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be di
220. be set as the achromatic color reference and the rest of the image is adjusted accordingly For instance if snow in a photo appears bluish click the bluish part to adjust the whole image and reproduce natural colors Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Tone Curve Page 520 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Tone Curve S306 Adjusting Tone Curve In ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab click Tone Curve Settings ES Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel e Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined e Red Adjust the Red channel e Green Adjust the Green channel e Blue Adjust the Blue channel EA Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Reading Tone Curves With ScanGear scanning images via a scanner is the input and displaying to a monitor is the output Tone Curve shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Tone Curve Page 521 of 707 pages Highlight Output brightness Shadow Shadow H
221. between A4 and Letter s gt Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter e Borderless copy You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders gt Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter Page 326 of 707 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Using Useful Copy Functions gt Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter U097 Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter You can switch the size of paper loaded on the Rear Tray between A4 and Letter This setting is useful if you usually load Letter sized paper in the Rear Tray regardless of the page size indication A4 on the Operation Panel or vice versa 1 Press the Maintenance button repeatedly until the LED displays as follows 2 Press the Black button to select A4 or the Color button to select Letter EA Note When you switch the page size to A4 or Letter load paper of the selected size regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel When the page size is set to A4 load A4 plain paper or photo paper When the page size is set to Letter load Letter sized plain paper or photo paper This setting is retained even if the machine is turned off Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Page 327 o
222. can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 3 Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list The selected image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 373 of 707 pages Face Shapener a oe Ib foto Photo Fix 22 29 Dy Face Smoctwag Ent C hert Urertlarne Pictured MP Navigator EX 2010_01_01 003 jpg E8 Note If you selected only one image in the View amp Use window the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears 4 Select Manual then click Adjust 5 Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level When you move a slider F Correct Enhance mark appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image Advanced Ent E Note Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone See Advanced in the descriptions of the Correct Enhance Images window for details Click Defaults to reset all adjustments Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new files E8 Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 374 of 707 pages To save only the images you like select them and click
223. can with One click tab or click Auto in the One click Mode screen to open the Auto Scan dialog box f Scan Scan documerts wth autoatically odusied setings and save them to your SS corper Scan Setings E Recemesegded mage Correction Soren Setings Flerane C Save as type Ato ue Set es Seven CALs UserName Piresi MP Navigate Bomen V Save to a Subtolder wth Gunes Date E Stet scanning by chcking the one chck button e Supported Documents Photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly In that case click another icon in the One click Mode screen or on the Custom Scan with One click tab and specify the document type or size A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents E8 Note To reduce moire click another icon in the One click Mode screen or on the Custom Scan with One click tab and set Document Type to Magazine Scan Settings e Recommended Image Correcti
224. canned correctly In that case specify the document type or size on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab and scan A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos s gt Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents E8 Note Scan from the Basic Mode Tab or Advanced Mode Tab to reduce moire e Placing Documents Placing Documents appears e Execute recommended image correction Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 551 of 707 pages P important When this checkbox is selected in ScanGear scanner driver started from MP Navigator EX the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected You can set this setting wnen Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan
225. canning S012 Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting the cropping frame scan area gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Selecting the best resolution gt Resolution Learning about file formats s File Formats Learning about Color Matching gt Color Matching Matching the colors between the document and monitor See Monitor Gamma in the following section s Color Settings Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 561 of 707 pages Nelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt Adjusting Cropping Frames 802 Adjusting Cropping Frames You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area of the ScanGear scanner driver screen When you click Scan only the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned and passed to the application Cropping Frame Types k ri m hs 1 1 Active Cropping Frame rotating thick broken lines The settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will be applied 2 Selected Cropping Frame stationary thick broken lines The settings will be applied to the Active Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames simultaneously You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key 3 Unselected Crop
226. cations do not display images clearly if the image is too small Check 3 If moire stripe pattern appears take the following measures and scan again e On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver select Magazine Color in Select Source gt Basic Mode Tab e On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear set Descreen in Image Settings to ON sb Image Settings E8 Note a f moire appears when you scan a digital print photo take the above measures and scan again e f you use MP Navigator EX set Document Type to Magazine Color or enable Descreen in the Scan Settings dialog box and scan again Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Check 4 Check the monitor s color depth e Windows 7 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization gt Adjust screen resolution gt Advanced settings On the Monitor tab of the displayed dialog box set Colors to High Color 16 bit or True Color 32 bit e Windows Vista From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization gt Adjust screen resolution to open the Display Settings dialog box Set the color depth to Medium 16 bit or Highest 32 bit e Windows XP From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Display to open the Display Properties dialog box On the Settings tab set Color quality to Medium 16 bit or Highest 32 bit Check 5 Clean the Platen and Document Cover Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document C
227. ces in a photo m Using the Face Sharpener Function Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles gt Using the Blemish Remover Function Image Adjustment You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 155 of 707 pages You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color gt Adjusting Images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 156 of 707 pages Wee Gilets Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function A066 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Auto Photo Fix Function This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click oer Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu
228. color tone using histogram a graph showing brightness distribution Adjusting Histogram Adjusting the image brightness using tone curve a graph of brightness balance s gt Adjusting Tone Curve Sharpening characters in text documents or reducing show through effects gt Setting Threshold Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correc Page 508 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc S308 The Image Settings functions on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver allow you to enhance the outline of the subjects reduce dust scratches and correct faded colors when scanning images GEE yee Din em 4 _ s TA E iia SO cc en Preferences Geer Setting Items Click Arrow of a function and select an item from the pull down menu Reduce Oust end Scratches None Fading Correction T Grain Correction Medium Bad daks Comeston a th P important Do not apply these functions to images without moire dust scratches or faded colors The color tone may be adversely af
229. commended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust the colors so that the portion turns white Preview image appears in the center Preview image colors change as you adjust them Color Adjustment Yellow Hoe Below is an example of correcting a bluish image Since Blue and Green are too strong click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct Ea Note Color adjustments are applied only to the scan area cropping frame or the frame selected in thumbnail view You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern screen You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image Increase the magenta to add a warm tint and increase the blue to add a cool tint Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 513 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance S303 Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance In ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab click lej Saturation Color Balance ES Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Saturation Adjust the image s saturatio
230. copying See step 1 in Copying Documents 2 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies See step 2 in Copying Documents 3 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type Note When the plain paper is selected for the media type the original is copied with borders When the photo paper is selected for the media type the original is copied without borders and fills the entire page In borderless copying slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page 4 Press the Fit to Page button The Fit to Page lamp lights up and the Fit to Page copy function is enabled The original is copied in the size automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size E9 Note Press the Fit to Page button again to cancel the Fit to Page copy function and copy the original in the same size 5 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts Fit to Page copying Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is completed gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until copying is completed E gt Note You can set the print quality to Fast speed priority only when A4 or Letter sized plain paper is selected for the page size and media type To set the print quality to Fast press and hold down the Color or Black button
231. correct printer status may not be recognized If a client user opens the printer driver properties to display the properties when using Windows 7 press the Alt key and select Printer properties from the displayed File menu and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box cleared on the Ports tab the bidirectional communication function of the printer server may also be disabled In this case check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the client system e When you print from a client system you cannot use Canon IJ Preview e When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system they may be grayed out In this case change the settings from the print server When you change the settings of the print server you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system and then specify the shared settings again in the client system When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client System as the Local Printer e The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system Q Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 702 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 703 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Using Easy PhotoPrint EX A001 Using Easy Ph
232. criptions of Easy PhotoPrint EX screens Click Help in a screen or dialog box or select Easy PhotoPrint EX Help from the Help menu Help appears About Exif Print Easy PhotoPrint EX supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications Easy PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications See the application s manual for details on the procedure for starting Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later supports the following functions Photo Print Album ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 0 or later supports the following functions Photo Print Aloum ZoomBrowser EX Ver 5 8 or later supports the following function Aloum Digital Photo Professional Ver 3 2 or later supports the following function Photo Print P important Easy PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo Professional Menu and Open do not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen Images cannot be corrected enhanced Image display order cannot be changed Edited images cannot be saved Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correcti
233. ct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Brightener Function 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Brightener awe Correct Enhance AS RedEye Correction 20 Face Bnghtener 123 Week p Strong Specii the ares pou want to conect 29 Face Shapener 29 Digtal Face Smoothing 209 Blewett Remover E8 Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area you can compare and check the result Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files E8 Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All
234. cted Images area 8 Save the scanned images gt Saving Saving as PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 353 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time S105 MP Navigator EX Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time You can scan two or more photos small documents at one time by setting Document Size to Auto Detect Multiple Documents in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX P important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case start ScanGear scanner driver then adjust the cropping frames scan areas in whole image view and scan again Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents gt Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 3 In Scan Import click Photos Documents Platen G Show this window of itatup T Proterences 4 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
235. cted Page 634 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected U324 Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected e Check 1 Is printing performed in Quiet Mode Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode on the computer For faster printing do not print in Quiet Mode gt Reducing the Machine Noise e Check 2 Is the print quality set too high Increase the printing speed setting in the printer driver Setting to prioritize speed makes printing faster 1 Open the printer driver setup window s gt Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer driver setup window quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available ES Note Setting to prioritize speed may reduce printing quality Printing speed may not improve noticeably by following the instructions above depending on your system environment Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 635 of 707 pages Nelieirlecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing U325 FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing e Check
236. cted folder and its subfolders G Refresh Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents m anal ad E oe Display Size Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window e Categories 7 Sort by Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category date ascending or descending or name ascending or descending Images can be sorted by category only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed Thumbnail Window e Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed When you select the checkbox of an image the image appears in the Selected Images area Selecting an image and clicking the file name highlights the file name allowing you to rename it Drag and drop an image to do the following things Move from one category to another within the Thumbnail window Move to a category folder displayed in My Box Scanned Imported Images Copy to a folder displayed in Specify Folder P important You cannot change the extension jpg pdf etc when renaming a file You cannot move or copy images to the date folders displayed in tree view in My Box Scanned Imported Images or Recently Saved Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 432 of 707 pages ES Note A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set Thumbnails may appear as in the following cases Opening unsupported images File size is too large and there is not enough memo
237. cuments Platen Displays the screen for scanning photos documents and other printed materials Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned Scanning photos Color Photo or Black and White Photo Scanning text documents Color Document Black and White Document or Text OCR Scanning magazines Magazine Color Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 418 of 707 pages P important You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected e Specify Specify the document size resolution and other advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents P important Specify is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear scanner driver Use ScanGear to correct images and adjust colors when scanning e Scan Scanning starts EA Note This button changes to Open Scanner Driver when you select the Use the scanner driver checkbox e Open Scanner Driver ScanGear starts See ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens for details on ScanGear screens E8 Note This button changes to Scan when you deselect the Use the scanner driver checkbox e Clear Delete all images in the Thumbnail window ES Note Images not saved on a computer will be deleted To keep important images use Save or other methods to sa
238. d To change the file click Browse to specify another one P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well e Rotate Left 90 Rotate Right 90 Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter clockwise or clockwise Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90 or Rotate Right 90 e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Mail Dialog Box Page 471 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning
239. d Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Page 336 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine U051 Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can forward scanned data to the computer using the Operation Panel of the machine The machine detects the type of the originals loaded on the Platen Glass automatically and the image is forwarded to the computer in the optimized size and resolution P important Load originals properly according to their type otherwise some originals may not be scanned properly Refer to Placing Documents for how to load the original on the Platen Glass The following items can be scanned Photos postcards visiting cards magazines newspapers documents BD DVD CDs The following items cannot be scanned properly e A4 sized photos e Documents smaller than 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as a paperback with its backbone cut off e Originals on thin white paper e Long and narrow originals such as panoramic photographs Before forwarding scanned data to the computer confirm the following e The necessary application software MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX is installed If the application software MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX is not yet installed insert the Setup CD ROM into the
240. d Features s gt Reducing the Machine Noise s gt Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 318 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Status Monitor P411 Canon IJ Status Monitor If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information The Canon lJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen You will know the status of the printer with graphics icons and messages Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon lJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer When launched the Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar We MP280 series Printer USB001 boj E3 Qpticn Ink Detats Help o i Document Name Test Page Pa Owner Canon Prrtng Page 171 Shop Now Daplay Part Queue Cancel Banting E8 Note To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region wh
241. d Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Restrictions on Printer Sharing P415 Restrictions on Printer Sharing If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment Check the restrictions for the environment you are using When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network e A print completion message may be displayed To disable the message to display follow the procedure below e If you are using Windows 7 In the Devices and Printers window of the client select the printer from Printers and Faxes and open the displayed Print server properties Uncheck Show information notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e If you are using Windows Vista Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system Open Run as administrator gt Server Properties from the displayed File menu Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e If you are using Windows XP Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window on the print server system Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e The bi directional communication function is disabled and the
242. d on the Platen Glass e Check the position and direction of the original loaded on the Platen Glass Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable Press the Stop Reset button to dismiss the error then take the actions described below e Make sure that the print head alignment sheet is set in the correct position and orientation on the Platen Glass e Make sure the Platen Glass and the print head alignment sheet are not dirty e Make sure the type and size of loaded paper is suitable for Automatic Print Head Alignment For Automatic Print Head Alignment always load one sheet of A4 or letter sized plain paper e Make sure if Print Head nozzles are clogged Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the Print Head s gt Routine Maintenance If the error is not resolved connect the machine to the computer and Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Page 608 of 707 pages align the Print Head on the printer driver s Aligning the Print Head Position POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately When the POWER and Alarm lamps flash alternately as shown below and the error code as follows is displayed on the LED an error requiring servicing might have occurred Cancel printing turn off the machine Then clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the FINE Cartridge Holder from moving and turn on th
243. d properly In this case clean the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller so perform this only when necessary You need to prepare three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and remove any paper from the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 3 Clean the Paper Feed Roller without paper 1 Press the j Maintenance button repeatedly until b appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it is cleaned 4 Clean the Paper Feed Roller with paper 1 Make sure that the Paper Feed Roller has stopped rotating and load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 2 Make sure that b appears on the LED then press the Black or Color button The machine starts cleaning The cleaning will be completed after the paper is ejected ES Note After the cleaning is completed press the Stop Reset button to return the LED to the copy standby mode If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller contact the service center O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Page 69 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine gt Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning C101 m Cleaning the Inside
244. d protected PDF files cannot be searched by text from the View amp Use Window Passwords cannot be set when images are automatically saved after scanning Open the password setting screen from images scanned into MP Navigator EX or existing files Setting Passwords for Scanned Images 1 Scan documents into the Scan Import window s gt Let s Try Scanning 2 Click Save as PDF file The Save as PDF file dialog box opens 3 Select the Password security settings checkbox VY Save the mage to the spected folder as a PDE fie Save as pe POF 0sutole Pages St You can save mutiple mages to one PDF fe wi ha page 4 rng toe mage to rearranze the pages She name mG Saver CAUsers serNaete Picis HP Navigator X 2010_0 Browse F Save to a Sublolder wth Gurert Date Cee eca Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 398 of 707 pages The Password Security Settings dialog box opens Setting Passwords for Existing Files 1 In the View amp Use window select image PDF files and click PDF 2 Click Create Edit PDF file on the list s gt Creating Editing PDF Files 3 Edit files in the Create Edit PDF file window then click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages The Save as PDF file dialog box opens 4 Select the Password security settings checkbox Save as POF file 4 Save the mage to the spectied folder as a PDE fie Sven CA
245. d subsequent pages Note Point to a thumbnail to display its title license type and other information Right click a thumbnail and select Open web page of work from the displayed menu to start a browser and display the page of a photo sharing site on which the image is posted 4 Selections Area Thumbnails of the images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed along with the number of images number of selected images number of search results Cancels all image selections in the Selections area banal Cancel image selection Cancels the selection of images selected in the Selections area Note See Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites for details on how to download images from photo sharing sites Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Questions and Answers Page 194 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers A200 Easy PhotoPrint EX Questions and Answers s gt How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File s gt Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from gt How Do Print with Even Margins m What Is C1 or C4 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File Page 195 of 707 pages NelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application
246. day select it and click Delete To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar period click Clear In the Add Edit Holiday dialog box that appears by clicking Add or Edit you can specify the name and date of the holiday Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Holidays Page 236 of 707 pages Set as Holiday Period From 12 2010 to 2 2011 Month Year December 2010 v Day om fas Day of week First v Sunday v l Co Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar Note See Help for details on each dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Calendar Display Page 237 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Calendar Display A100 Easy PhotoPrint Ex Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display fonts lines colors position size etc Click Settings in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click Setup Calendar to display the Calendar Settings dialog box P important The Position amp Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from the Edit screen Style for Days of Week fre Week Stats on
247. de are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode In that case specify the document type or size A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 478 of 707 pages ES Note To reduce moire set Document Type to Magazine e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Creer Yeh 850 inches 1 008 50 Kogt 11 00 inches 1 00 11 65 oe z lt P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Plat
248. der wth Qurert Date D Open the save ddog box after scanning the image Ea Note See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Tab Page 482 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt General Tab S740 MP Navigator EX General Tab On the General tab you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings Save is My Box CAUsers serttsme Pictures HP Navigator EX Location of Texpocary Files C sers nee Naece Pictres MP Negue EX Fopteston to run Pert Photo Eary PhotoPart EX Paint Abum Easy PhatoPart EX Conven to te flo Netepad Stach to Eesi None esch Manua Open POF fie DXX e Product Name Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use If the displayed product is not the one you want to use select the desired product from the list e Save in My Box Displays the folder in which to save scanned documents To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Locati
249. dge Locking Cover is not closed securely ink may not be ejected correctly Open the Scanning Unit Cover open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover When you close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place e Check 3 When a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink replace it with a new one e Check 4 Is the Nozzle Check Pattern printed properly Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge Ea Note Printed colors may not match screen colors due to basic differences in the methods used to produce colors Color control settings and environmental differences can also affect how colors appear on the screen Th
250. ding on the document If the page background is not white shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all While scanning press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview the scan If the binding part is not even the shadow will not be corrected properly i D mepa How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned Note Cover the document with black cloth if white spots streaks or colored patterns appear in scan results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen If the shadow is not corrected properly adjust the cropping frame on the preview image gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Adjustment Buttons Page 547 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Color Adjustment Buttons S807 Color Adjustment Buttons ea ema A l The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones You can adjust the image s overall brightness or contrast and adjust its highlight and shadow values histogram or balance tone curve P important The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box
251. directions e Save as type Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file EA Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are scanned e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 470 of 707 pages PDF Add Page cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Set Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening editing and printing created PDF files s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Addto This is displayed when you select PDF Add Page for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are adde
252. displayed after pressing the SCAN button In this case select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 and click OK You can set MP Navigator EX to launch whenever pressing the SCAN button For details see For Windows Users If you are using Windows XP The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the SCAN button for the first time In this case specify MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 as the application software to use select Always use this program for this action then click OK From the next time MP Navigator EX is automatically started P important The position or size of an image is not scanned correctly depending on the type of the original In this case refer to Scanning Photos and Documents to change the settings in Document Type and Document Size of MP Navigator EX to match the original and scan it using MP Navigator EX If you want to scan originals with advanced settings or if you want to edit or print the scanned images If you scan originals from a computer using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX enables you to edit the scanned images such as optimizing or trimming In addition you can edit or print the scanned images using the bundled application software to make better use of them s gt Let s Try Scanning Note You can use a WIA compliant application software and the Control Panel Windows XP only to scan originals with this machine For details refer to Other Scanning Methods If you want to convert a scanned document
253. dividually created printing ICC profile in an application software to print data 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified color correction method P important When ICM is disabled in the application software ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable Related Topics s gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 287 of 707 pages Adna ail Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data P014 Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose Color Management Devices such as digital cameras scann
254. djustment values display L on the LED then press the Black or Color button O Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals A Page top Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 61 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing a FINE Cartridge cog Replacing a FINE Cartridge When remaining ink cautions or errors occur the error code will appear on the LED to inform you of the error Refer to An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide and take an appropriate action E8 Note For information on the compatible FINE Cartridges refer to the printed manual Getting Started m Replacing Procedure When you need to replace FINE Cartridges follow the procedure below gt Important Handling FINE Cartridges Do not touch the electrical contacts A or print head nozzles B on the FINE Cartridge The machine may not print properly if you touch it If you remove a FINE Cartridge replace it immediately Do not leave the machine with FINE Cartridges removed Use new FINE Cartridges for replacement Installing used FINE Cartridges may cause the nozzles to clog Furthermore with such cartridges the machine will not be able to inform you when to replace the cartridges properly Once a FINE Cartridge has been installed do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the open This will cause the FINE Cartridge to dry out
255. document Copying Color Grayscale or Black 300 dpi and White Attaching to e mail Color Grayscale or Black 150 dpi and White Scanning text using OCR Color or Grayscale 300 dpi 400 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Resolution Page 566 of 707 pages dpi P important f you double the resolution the file size quadruples If the file is too large the processing speed will slow down significantly and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals File Formats Page 567 of 707 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt File Formats S310 File Formats You can select a file format when saving scanned images You should specify the most suitable format according to how you want to use the image on which application Available file formats vary by application and computer Windows or Macintosh See below for the characteristics of each image file format BMP Standard File Extension bmp A standard file format for Windows BMP is often selected for images that are used only on Windows JPEG Standard File Extension jpg A file format often used on websites and for digital camera images JPEG features high compression rates JPEG images slightly degrade every t
256. dy he aea pou mare D corect 22 Face Shapener OS vouruesecsticg yeh Blew Remover wee E Note The Face Brightener Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 6 Drag to select the area you want to correct enhance then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 370 of 707 pages Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Page 371 of 707 pages The portion in and around the selected area is corrected enhanced and F Correct Enhance mark appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image ES Note You can also drag to rotate the rectangle Click Undo to undo the latest correction enhancement Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image 7 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected enhanced images as new files EA Note To save only the images you like select them and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images The file format of corrected enhanced images is JPEG Exif 8 Click Exit P important The corrections enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinte
257. e TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons Contact the computer s administrator for help Some computers including laptops connected to the machine may not resume correctly from standby mode In that case restart the computer Do not connect two or more machines or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same computer simultaneously If multiple scanning devices are connected you cannot scan from the Operation Panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices Use the default display font size of the OS Otherwise software screens may not appear correctly Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode In that case follow these steps and scan again 1 Turn off the machine 2 Exit ScanGear then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it 3 Turn on the machine ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time Within an application ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high resolutions For example at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600 dpi in full color ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scan
258. e tape D gently Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 62 of 707 pages Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 63 of 707 pages gt Important If you shake a FINE Cartridge ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area Handle a FINE Cartridge carefully Be careful not to stain your hands and the surrounding area with ink on the removed protective tape Do not reattach the protective tape once you have removed it Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Do not touch the electrical contacts or print head nozzles on a FINE Cartridge The machine may not print properly if you touch it 5 Install the FINE Cartridge 1 Put a new FINE Cartridge in the FINE Cartridge Holder The Color FINE Cartridge should be installed into the left slot and the Black FINE Cartridge should be installed into the right slot 2 Close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover to lock the FINE Cartridge into place Push down the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks 3 Confirm that the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is closed correctly E8 Note If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed correctly push down the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 64 of 707 pages E Closed correctly F Not closed correctly the cover is tilted gt Important The mach
259. e the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward In such cases follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0 1 inch 3 mm B in height before printing This may improve the print result C C Printing side We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time e Check 4 If you are printing on thick paper select the Prevent paper abrasion setting Selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting will widen the clearance between the Print Head and the loaded paper If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper set the machine to prevent paper abrasion by using the Operation Panel or the computer Print speed may be reduced if you are selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting Deactivate the Prevent paper abrasion setting once printing is complete If not this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs e To set by using the Operation Panel Press the Maintenance button repeatedly until the LED displays as follows then press the Black button to enable the Prevent paper abrasion function To disable the Prevent paper abrasion function press the Maintenance button repeatedly until the LED above appears then press the Color button e To set by using your computer Open the printer driver setup window and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet select the Prevent paper abrasion c
260. e 568 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt Color Matching S815 Color Matching Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor or a printed image with the colors of the original document Example When sRGB is selected as the output profile target Input Profile Source ScanGear Scanner Driver 4 Output Profile Target OS Application Application Printer Driver ScanGear converts the image s color space from the scanner s color space to sRGB When displaying on a monitor the image s color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor s color space based on the operating system s monitor settings and the application s working space settings When printing the image s color space is converted from sRGB to the printer s color space based on the application s print settings and the printer driver s settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Scanning Methods Page 569 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Other Scanning Methods Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver s gt Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with WIA Driver Page 570 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt
261. e Change Layout dialog box you can change the layout or select whether to print the date on which the picture was taken on the photo ES Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation Double page album or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout dialog box and click Date Settings 5 If you want to change the background click Background The Change Background dialog box appears In the Change Background dialog box you can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 117 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting a Photo A023 g Easy PhotoPrint EX S6 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select roges for abura You can abo add repkce ragas atar ri the edtng process To Comect or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Aaly Corrections ane enhancements ni the resuming screen 4 WE AR Sort by Date a EB to amp Loro
262. e Color This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used With the Monochrome Effects function you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Monochrome Effects Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color When you use Select Color move the Color slider to specify the color you want The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Pan Paper Leter 85 11 215 5 273 4mm 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with a single color Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 304 of 707 pages P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Monochrome Effects appears grayed out and is unavailable Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 305 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors P023 Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver i
263. e Copies Click Copy setting to select the number of copies to be printed e Grayscale Printing Select this checkbox to print the document in black and white e Preview before printing Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing e Defaults Restore the default settings e Print Start printing with the specified settings Note To cancel while spooling click Cancel To cancel while printing click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status To open a confirmation window for the printer status click printer icon on the taskbar Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Photo Dialog Box Page 439 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Print Photo Dialog Box S729 Print Photo Dialog Box Click Print in the View amp Use window then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box M1 Printer Prpetias Paper Sige Letter 8511 Meda Tyre Plan Paper gt Page Layout Feto Page Porting gt E Bordedess Parting a 5 Potrat AJ Landscace Copies 1 Fl ved Photo E Preis before parting P important The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed Easy PhotoPrint EX starts instead PDF files cannot be printed ES Note Double click an image to displa
264. e FINE Cartridge Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 629 of 707 pages e Check 3 Perform Print Head Alignment Aligning the Print Head ES Note a If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Does Not Start Page 630 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Does Not Start U321 Printing Does Not Start e Check 1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in then turn the machine on While the POWER lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit green E8 Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics it may take longer to start printing While the POWER lamp is flashing green the computer is processing data and sending it to the machine Wait until printing starts e Check 2 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the machine directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller o
265. e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are selected e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well When Opened from the View amp Use Window PDF Add Page cannot be selected If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Set Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening editing and printing created PDF files gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Add to This is displayed when you select PDF Add Page for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added To change the file click Browse to specify another one P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applicat
266. e Right Rotates the target image outlined in orange 90 degrees clockwise AA Invert Inverts the target image outlined in orange horizontally O Trimming Trims the target image outlined in orange Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest Click this button to open the Crop window and specify the trimming frame pai aa Zoom in Enlarges the target image outlined in orange You can also enlarge the image by double clicking it laal E oa Display Size Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window By Date a Y Sort by Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date ascending or descending Thumbnail Window e Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed When you select the checkbox of an image the image appears in the Selected Images area EA Note Thumbnails may appear as when there is not enough memory to display the images When Images are Sorted by Categories e Close All Open All You can hide or show all images in the displayed categories e Close All Hides all images e Open All Displays all images Note When you click Close All the button changes to Open All Selected Images Area o bii Cancel All Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area o bed Cancel Selection Cancels the selection of the target image outlined in orange in the Selected Images area e Selected Ima
267. e Selected Images area e Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed Related Topic Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Create Edit PDF file Window Page 434 of 707 pages WelFisesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Create Edit PDF file Window 715 Create Edit PDF file Window Click PDF in the View amp Use window then click Create Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create Edit PDF file window In the Create Edit PDF file window you can add delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files created with MP Navigator EX aR Reamange Pages 1G lt fo on 3 Delete Selected Paper Adi Page IMG_00M po page t Undo Sare Selected Pages Sve Al Page Freh C Urers Userhlame Pictures WO Navigator DAMLI M OUM ONE jpg P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions f apassword protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords Setting Passwords for PDF Files You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX e Rearrange Pages You can move the selected image outlined in orange i lt e Moves the selected image to the top lt e Moves the selected image up one page gt
268. e Stop Reset button to release the error Note You can set the print quality to Fast speed priority only when A4 or Letter sized plain paper is selected for the page size and media type To set the print quality to Fast speed priority 1 Press and hold down the Color or Black button for 2 or more seconds in 3 of step 2 The LED flashes once When you press the Color or Black button for less than 2 seconds the machine starts copying in the print quality Standard 2 Release the button The machine starts copying When the print quality is set to Fast print speed is given priority over quality To give priority to quality press the Color or Black button for less than 2 seconds to copy in the print quality Standard gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until copying is completed Note To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button m Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Documents Page 15 of 707 pages You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter This setting is useful if you usually load Letter sized paper in the Rear Tray regardless of the page size indication A4 on the Operation Panel or vice versa 1 Press the j Maintenance button repeatedly until d appears 2 Press the Black button to select A4 or the Color button to select 8
269. e a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create your own calendar using your favorite photos It ll be exciting to turn the calendar pages You can also create 2 month 6 month and 12 month You can use all kinds of photos calendars Create Stickers Create stickers easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends CHECK You can add text to photos Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 705 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using MP Navigator EX Page 706 of 707 pages AJAn Gites Advanced Guide gt Using MP Navigator EX S001 Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents It is suitable even for beginners Start MP Navigator EX apo Here MP Navigator EX ES Note See Let s Try Scanning for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX Scan Photos and Documents You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens You can also save print scanned images using MP Navigator EX a MP Navigator EX Scan Small Documents at One Time You can scan multiple small documents photos cards etc at one time It is useful as you do not need to scan multiple times 7 A p m A n MISE Scan Large Documents Yo
270. e application setting e Set Allows you to select an application to start e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One click Mode e Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes e Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings When Save as type is Auto a confirmation appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preferences Dialog Box Page 481 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Preferences Dialog Box S705 MP Navigator EX Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box In the Preferences dialog box you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings and how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel via the General and Scanner Button Settings tabs Cems Achons Scan Settings Docurract Sin Ato Ato Seocty_ Saree Settings D AAomastcally save the erage to your computer afer scanning t Fie Name ING Sweetie f Saven Csen UnerNeme Pectures WP Naga __ rows F Sawe to a Subfoi
271. e copyright Additionally reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights E8 Note For information on installing or starting Easy WebPrint EX see Easy WebPrint EX The clip function for example allows you to clip desired parts of web pages and edit them to print For details on operating Easy WebPrint EX refer to the online help Click Easy WebPrint EX A on the toolbar then select Help from the pull down menu to view the online help A a gt up uh weie Oe XXXXXXXXXXXX Dx XXXXXXXXXXX LiL i i F Branne A if My amp A wom eG om KXXKXXXXXXXX Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Page 32 of 707 pages O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Various Software Applications Page 33 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Starting Various Software Applications C055 Starting Various Software Applications This section describes Solution Menu EX which is used to start the software applications supplied with the machine The information on Easy WebPrint EX a software application for printing web pages is also included m Solution Menu EX Solution Menu EX is a software application that provides quick access to other software applications supplied with the machine manuals and online product information ES Note Install Solu
272. e from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab Then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 272 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background P405 Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used You can select a bitmap file bmp and register it as a new background You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background An unnecessary background can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows Registering New Background 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab TR ak Setup lt gt Man 3 Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance El Page Sue Letter 85x117 gt El a Onertation A Pora A Landrcone Rotate 190 degrees a Same as Page Size Page Layout Nomssire a E H 9 al Nomalcize Bordetess Fat Page Scaled Page Layout Pian Paper Leter 8 S11 215 2279 4eam m J La 0
273. e images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Red Eye Correction Surround a red aea to specily the aes you went to conect 22 Face Baghterer 992 Face Shatpernt of Dipta Face Smoothing 29 Blemish Remover Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red Eye Correction Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Paintbrush 5 Drag to select the red area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 160 of 707 pages Red eye is corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E9 Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files E8 Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is avai
274. e machine again P important Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine The machine may not print out properly if you touch it Ifthe problem is not resolved contact the LED display service center IP i Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply A Contact the service center LED display Other cases than above Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals LED Cannot Be Seen At All Page 609 of 707 pages AdvancedGmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt LED Cannot Be Seen At All U343 LED Cannot Be Seen At All e If the POWER lamp is off The machine is not powered on Connect the power cord and press the ON button e If the POWER lamp is lit The LED may be in the screen saver mode On the Operation Panel press a button other than the ON button Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 610 of 707 pages Anad S Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the MP Drivers U308 Cannot Install the MP Drivers e If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD ROM is inserted into your computer s disc drive Start the installation following the
275. e page PDF file via Print Document printing may take time depending on your computer In that case follow these steps and change settings Windows 7 1 From the Start menu select Devices and Printers 2 Right click the icon of your printer and click Printer Properties The printer properties dialog box opens 3 Click the Advanced tab 4 Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster 5 Select Start printing after last page is spooled 6 After printing return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately Windows Vista Windows XP 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel 2 Click Printer Windows XP Printers and Faxes 3 Right click the icon of your printer and click Properties The printer properties dialog box opens 4 Click the Advanced tab 5 Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster 6 Select Start printing after last page is spooled 7 After printing return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately To cancel while spooling click Cancel To cancel while printing click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status To open a confirmation window for the printer status click printer icon on the taskbar Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 391 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utili
276. e top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 202 of 707 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Cropping Photos Photo Print A073 Cropping Photos Photo Print Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions Click Crop Image in the Layout Print screen or double click the preview image Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK ES Note To move the cropping area place the cursor within the white frame and drag it Drag the white lines to enlarge reduce the cropping area Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines To create a balanced composition drag any of the intersecting points white squares or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo The cropping effect applies only to the print result The original image will not be cropped See Help for details on the Crop window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 203 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print S
277. ecessary software applications MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX installed Install MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX from the Setup CD ROM when they have not been installed or have been uninstalled To install MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX select MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX in Custom Install Are the settings for saving scanned data specified with MP Navigator EX When you save scanned data on the computer using the Operation Panel you can specify the settings for saving scanned data in Preferences of MP Navigator EX For details on the settings refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Does the original to be scanned meet the requirements for the original to be loaded on the Platen Glass For details see Originals You Can Load Is the machine connected to a computer correctly Confirm that the connection between the machine and the computer is physically secure m Saving Scanned Data on the Computer 1 Prepare for scanning 1 Turn on the power See Operation Panel 2 Load an original on the Platen Glass See Loading Originals ES Note Characters and lines written with a light colored pen or highlight pen may not be scanned properly 2 Press the SCAN button to start scanning MP Navigator EX will be started and the scanned data will be saved on the computer according to the settings specified with MP Navigator EX Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is completed gt Important D
278. ecify a folder on a drive with sufficient free space s gt General Tab Check 4 Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports Disconnect other devices Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page 659 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows S911 Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Check Disconnect the USB cable then uninstall and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX e Step 1 Uninstall the MP Drivers See Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers for details e Step 2 Uninstall MP Navigator EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt MP Navigator EX 4 0 gt MP Navigator EX Uninstall ES Note In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting up software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account follow the on screen instructions 2 When a confirmation appears click Yes 3 When uninstallation is complete click OK MP Navigator EX is uninstalled e Step 3 Reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX Insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then select Custom Install and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX Page top
279. ected folder and its subfolders See Starting MP Navigator EX to start MP Navigator EX Quick Search In A Text box on the Toolbar enter a word or phrase included in the file name Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for then click A Search For Exif information text in Maker Model Description and User Comment is searched Advanced Search Click Search on the left of the screen to open search options Enter information of the image you want to search for then click Start Search Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Searching Images Search in My Box Scanned imported mages v File Name A word phrase in the file C Categoy Unclassified w C Modfied Date 17 1 2010 V7 1 2010 w C Shooting Date V 1 2010 17 1 2010 w More Advanced Options A word of phase in Ihe fle Exif information POF text Search sublolder C Case senstive Match al criteria O Match any ciiletia Start Search Search in If you know where to look for select the drive folder or network from Specify Folder File Name If you know the file name enter it A word or phrase in the file Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options P important For PDF files you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX You cannot search PDF files created or edited in other applications Also searching PDF files i
280. ected with the Paper button 13 Alarm lamp Lights or flashes orange when an error occurs such as paper out or ink out In the software applications or manuals the Black and Color buttons are collectively called the Start or OK button O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals LED Display and Basic Operations Page 9 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Overview of the Machine gt LED Display and Basic Operations C002 LED Display and Basic Operations You can use the machine to make copies or perform maintenance operations without a computer This section describes the LED display and basic operations on the Operation Panel The number 1 appears on the LED normally when turning on the power The LED display indicates the machine status as follows Machine Status LED Display While copying Number of copies flashing While printing scanning or performing maintenance operations m bap flashing in order When an error occurs E and number appear alternately For details on the error codes refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide P and number appear alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide While the Scanning Unit Cover is se Fl flashing Number of Copies When copying starts the specified number o
281. ed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Page 537 of 707 pages E8 Note You can specify the scan area cropping frame on the displayed image In thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame per image In whole image view you can create multiple cropping frames gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Related Topic Scanning in Advanced Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Input Settings Page 538 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Input Settings S804 Input Settings Rese Oust ond Scenes Fedro Correction Gan Correon 1 Baddght Correction i Gutter Sadow Correction i ei PPP PVE ewa e Input Settings allows you to set the following items e Select Source The type of document to be scanned is displayed e Paper Size Select the size of the document to be scanned This setting is available in whole image view only When you select a size the Preview area size changes accordingly P important Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive ScanGear scanner driver can scan data that is of 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less f you change Paper Size after previewing the preview image will be deleted EA Note If you are not sure which size y
282. ed as the text cannot be detected correctly Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text Documents with extremely large or small fonts Documents with small amount of text Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Settings Dialog Box Page 428 of 707 pages Documents containing figures images Hand written documents Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines tables e PDF Compression Select a compression type for saving e Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Compresses the file size when saving allowing you to reduce the load on your network server P important Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high compression P important Compression type cannot be set when Color Mode is Black and White e Security Set passwords for opening editing and printing the created PDF files P important This function is not available when images are automatically saved after scanning Note Select Password Security and set passwords in the Password Security Settings dialog box Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 429 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigato
283. ed captured or updated date Specify Folder Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail window to the right Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name allowing you to rename it Recently Saved Images Scanned Imported Images and images that have been Attached to E mail or Sent to Application recently are displayed in tree view by date Select a Month Date Year folder to display images by date in the Thumbnail window to the right Image date is the scanned or sent date Click Clear History to clear all data date folders and images displayed in Recently Saved Images E8 Note The actual image files are not deleted Search The advanced search options opens s gt Searching Images Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu P important Jump to Main Menu is not displayed when the window is opened directly from Solution Menu EX Image Handling Buttons e Image Handling Buttons Specify what to do with the selected images See the corresponding sections below for details on each button s gt Creating Editing PDF Files gt Printing Documents gt Printing Photos gt Sending via E mail s gt Editing Files ES Note The buttons in Image Handling Buttons are displayed when the corresponding applications are installed Toolbar e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced s
284. ed Paes Abi Page Save Selected Pages Save Ad Pages G_i Freh C Urerd rerhlame Pictures NO Mawigatee DAMLA OI ONUS ONL jpg A Enlarge Enlarges the image displayed in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Create Edit PDF file Window Page 436 of 707 pages z Reduce Reduces the image displayed in Preview e ma Full screen Displays the entire image Thumbnail Mode Switches to Thumbnail Mode The pages are displayed in thumbnail view Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Document Dialog Box Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Print Document Dialog Box S718 Print Document Dialog Box Click Print in the View amp Use window then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document dialog box In the Print Document dialog box you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images at one time Prirtor Paper Souco Rax Thay X Pope Lave hd Nomabore Nounabsize ae iom i TT 4 Paper Se v Pit Oy a E Meda Tipe e Printer Select the printer to use e Paper Source Select paper source e Page Layout Select a print type Normal size Printing Print one image per sheet Scaled Printing Print images at the selected scale enlarged or reduced Fit to Page Printing Print an
285. ed as thumbnails miniatures Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Still Images from Videos Page 181 of 707 pages ES Note Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are displayed The selected video plays 3 Select the video from which you want to capture still images and click OK The selected video plays in Preview of the Video Frame Capture window Video Frame Capture Aamo Frame Captere Setings Y 0 0000 00 Captured frames Select Video Exit 4 CWsorsUserNamguWvi 0001 MOV Selected 0 ES Note Da Pause appears while a video plays and ia Playback appears while a video is stopped Use om Pause and lt i gt Frame backward Frame advance to display the frame you want to capture 4 Display the frame you want to capture and click Capture The captured still image is displayed in the Captured frame s area P important You can capture up to 150 frames from one video 5 Select the image s you want to save and click Save When the Save dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save ES Note Only JPEG Exif data format is available for saving created still images 6 Click Exit P important The captured still images will be deleted if you exit before saving them ES Note You can automatically capture multiple still images from a video Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating St
286. ed with ink It does not affect the performance of the machine Do not touch the area A The machine may not print properly if you touch it m Operation Panel Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 6 of 707 pages Main Components Page 7 of 707 pages 1 9 8 1 ON button POWER lamp Turns the power on or off Before turning on the power make sure that the Document Cover is closed gt Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power be sure to confirm that the POWER lamp is not lit If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing the machine may become unable to print properly since the Print Head is not protected E8 Note POWER and Alarm lamps You can check the status of the machine with the POWER lamp and Alarm lamp POWER lamp is off The power is off POWER lamp lights green The machine is ready to print POWER lamp flashes green The machine is initializing or shutting down Alarm lamp lights or flashes orange An error has occurred and the machine is not ready to print For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide POWER lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2
287. educe or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio e Add Delete Opens the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box in which you can specify custom output sizes Add Delete the Output Size eS Destration Outs Sre Ust Prnt Output Sre Name New Setting Width 6 00 In the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected along with the predefined items Add To add a size select Print or Image display for Destination then enter Output Size Name Width and Height then click Add For Unit you can select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image display The name of the added size appears in Output Size List Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List Delete To delete an item select it in Output Size List and click Delete Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List P important You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels Note Save up to 10 items for each destination An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range Enter a value within the range displayed in the message Note See Adjusting Cropping Frames for details on cropping frames For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image see
288. el gt Hardware and Sound gt Scanners and Cameras Select WIA Canon XXX ser where XXX is your machine s name then click the Properties button If the User Account Control screen appears click Continue Click the Events tab on the WIA Canon XXX ser Properties where XXX is your machine s name screen Select Start this program for Actions then select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 from the pull down menu Choose an event from the Select an event pull down menu then select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 to launch for each event If MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 is already selected for each event click Cancel Click OK Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Problems with Scanning Page 647 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning S901 Problems with Scanning gt Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas s gt Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Slow Scanning Speed gt There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed s gt Computer Stops Operating during Scanning s gt Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Does
289. el the check process click Cancel P important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Consequently perform cleaning only when necessary Note a If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning switch off the machine wait 24 hours and then perform Deep Cleaning again If there is still no sign of improvement see Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Related Topic s gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 586 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers P027 Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows z Roller Cleaning Prepare the machine Remove all sheets of paper from the rear tray N Open the printer driver setup window Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The confirmation message appears Execute paper feed roller cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and click OK Paper feed roller cleaning starts o
290. ems detected as documents and for items detected as photos Auto Save Settings x When Ato Scan detected the tern as doaert FoF xj a When Ato Scan detected the tem as photo JPEG Ext esa e When JPEG Exif is Selected Click Set to specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e When PDF is Selected Click Set to make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC Page 486 of 707 pages e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the
291. en e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the Custom dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen e Specify Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode P important When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White EA Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards BD DVD CD and business card
292. eo frames and create still images in these windows In the Movie Print window you can print the captured still images P important This function is supported under Windows XP or later However it is not supported under the 64 bit editions of Windows XP This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 5 or later Supplied with Canon digital cameras supporting MOV format video recording is not installed When the color tone of a video is changed via the settings of the graphic driver video card or its utility such a change is not reflected in still images captured from the video Therefore color tones may differ between videos and captured still images To display the Video Frame Capture window click g Capture frames from video in the Select Images screen or Add Image dialog box To the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click To display the Movie Print window select Photo Print in Solution Menu EX and click the Movie Print icon ES Note The Movie Print window displayed via Solution Menu EX is used as an example in the following descriptions The window displayed varies depending on how Easy PhotoPrint EX is started Movie Print Print Nadia Type Photo Paper Pius Glossy ll sx 10xtSem Print Setings Auto Frame Capture SeTings 00005 83 4 Captured frames Select Video 2 Ine F Save Baten 0 00 03 06 0000 05 83 ClWsers
293. er Output Slot or the Rear Tray In Other Cases Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Launching MP Navigator EX Whenever Pressing the SCAN Button on the Machine Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Slow Scanning Speed There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Software Problems E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program Downloaded from M
294. er Printing gt Booklet Printing s gt Duplex Printing s gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background s gt Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with Easy Setup Page 242 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing with Easy Setup P000 Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select a printing profile suited for the purpose When you select a printing profile the Additional Features Media Type and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset DR casck Seno E Man SB Page Senp of Btects Ad Marterance 200 1 Piring Bordedens Prrting eml Printing Grayscale Arero Duplex Penting Feat Speed Proy Pere from Last Page Meds Type Porter Paper Sre Plan Power hemor BSN Onentation Porat Landscape Peet Quaity Paper Source Sanders gt Reo Trey Copes 1 1 489 E Aways Brrt wth Curent Settings igacnons Defauts
295. ere you are using your machine When Errors Occur The Canon lJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs e g if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low In such cases take the appropriate action as described Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Canon IJ Preview Page 319 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Preview P412 Canon IJ Preview The Canon lJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout print order and number of pages You can also change the media type settings When you want to display a preview before printing open the printer driver setup window click the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab and check the Preview before printing check box When you do not want to display a preview before printing uncheck the check box P important f you are using the XPS printer driver see Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Related Topic s gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
296. erefore colors of printing results may be different from those on the screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Lines Are Misaligned Page 620 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Lines Are Misaligned U315 Lines Are Misaligned D e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform Print Head Alignment If printed lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position s gt Aligning the Print Head E8 Note f the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position e Check 3 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 4 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used thin lines may not be printed Try thickening the lines in the document Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 621 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink B
297. erforming Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Optimizer PRO Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab TR ack Setup lt gt Man GB Page Setup of Efecte AJ Martenance Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box Images within each page are optimized on an image by image basis ES Note Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been processed such as being cropped or rotated In this case the entire page will be treated as a single image to be optimized 3 Complete the setup Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 309 of 707 pages Click OK When you execute print the printer corrects the photo coloring and prints out the photos P important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when e Background is set in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab Define Stamp is selected in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab and the bitmapped stamp is configured Note Depending on images the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing Photo Noise Page 310 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality
298. erless printing reduce the amount of extension The extension amount decreases as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left P important When the amount of extension is decreased an unexpected margin may be produced on the print depending on the size of the paper Note When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position image data will be printed in the full size When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab you can confirm whether there will be no Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Execute Borderless Printing Page 251 of 707 pages border before printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Fit to Page Printing Page 252 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Fit to Page Printing P004 Fit to Page Printing Festival pe Festival ili The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set fit to page printing Select Fit to Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab FR aksn E Man 58 Page Sete of tects fj Martenance El Page Sze Letier 85x117 Fi amp Onereaton A Porat A Langrcepe i Rotate 180 degrees BD Pree Peper Sze Letter 85x11 gt E B
299. ernet Explorer confirm the following E8 Note You can use Easy WebPrint EX with Internet Explorer 7 or later e Check 1 Is Canon Easy WebPrint EX is displayed on the Toolbars menu in the Internet Explorer s View menu If Canon Easy WebPrint EX is not displayed Easy WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer Perform Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then select Easy WebPrint EX to install it onto your computer E8 Note f Easy WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer a message asking you to install it may be displayed on the notification area on the taskbar Click the message then follow the instructions on the computer screen to install Easy WebPrint EX a While the installation or download Easy WebPrint EX is in progress it is necessary to access the Internet A connection charge is taken upon yourself e Check 2 Is Canon Easy WebPrint EX selected on the Toolbars menu in the Internet Explorer s View menu If Canon Easy WebPrint EX is not selected Easy WebPrint is disabled Select Canon Easy WebPrint EX to enable it Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Page 613 of 707 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly U309 Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device ca
300. ers monitors and printers handle color differently Color management color matching is a method that manages device dependent colors as a common color space For Windows a color management system called ICM is built into the operating system Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB ICC profiles convert device dependent colors into a common color space By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data The recommended printing method depends on the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data or the application software to be used There are two typical printing methods Check the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data and the application software to be used and then select the printing method suited to your purpose Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver e To print using Canon Digital Photo Color The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three dimensional effects and high sharp contrasts e To print by directly applying editing and touch up results of an application software When prin
301. es roughness in images Apply to all frames Select this checkbox to correct all the images displayed in the thumbnail list OK Applies Noise Reduction to the selected images or all images Noise will be reduced to make the images more vivid ES Note Correction may take time depending on your environment 1 When the Enhance resolutions checkbox is selected Noise Reduction and Enhance resolutions are applied simultaneously Reset Selected Frames Cancels all corrections applied to the selected images Exit Closes the Correct Captured Frames window and returns to the Video Frame Capture or Movie Print window Source images will be overwritten by the corrected ones Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 186 of 707 pages Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Page 187 of 707 pages 2 Toolbar Reduce Enlarge frame Reduces or enlarges the displayed image Whole frame Displays the entire image in Preview LL Compare Displays the Compare Captured Frames window You can compare the images before and after the correction side by side The image before the correction is displayed on the left and the image after the correction is displayed on the right of the window Compare Captured Frames Before Sort by Time Displays the captured still images in the order of the time code Note See Creating Still Images from Videos for details on how to create still images from videos Page t
302. es automatic corrections suitable for photos P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box a To display the Preferences dialog box click ait Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting ES Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG 1 For Photo Print you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes Note For Photo Print you can also automatically correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect leve
303. es checkbox Manual Enhancement 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing 90 Digtal Face Smoothing i 3 Weak ai Stong Specify the area you wert to conect 29 Blemish Remover Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 169 of 707 pages Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click o Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result a Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
304. escreen is the function for reducing this moire effect Note Even if Descreen is set to ON some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON In that case set Unsharp Mask to OFF Selecting Magazine Color in Select Source on the Basic Mode tab has the same effect as setting Descreen to ON on the Advanced Mode tab e Reduce Dust and Scratches Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches Use this function to reduce such noise e None Dust and scratches will not be reduced e Low Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches Large ones may remain e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this to reduce small large dust particles and scratches Evidence of the reduction process may remain and may also remove delicate parts of the image P important This function may not be effective for some types of photos Note It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials e Fading Correction Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors e None Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 545 of 707 pages Fading correction will not be applied e Low Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast e Medium It is recommended t
305. especially useful when printing low resolution images from Web pages The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set image optimizer Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab Py sek Seno lt gt Mon SB Page Setup of Etocs ij Martensnce Sungate Busrston a fe 3 Complete the setup Click OK The photos and graphics will be adjusted and printed with smooth outlines E8 Note Depending on application software or resolution of image data the image optimizer may have no discernible effects Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 307 of 707 pages t may take longer to complete printing when the image optimizer is used Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 308 of 707 pages AdvancediGmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration P408 Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images It is specially designed to compensate for color shift overexposure and underexposure The procedure for p
306. ettings gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print A074 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print To print the date the photo was taken on the photo click E Date Settings in the Layout Print screen then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box F Print date Text Orientation A lardscape Portrait Position Color E Apaly to all images SS Ga Ga Ge Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 204 of 707 pages Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 205 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page A076 Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple photo layout in the Layout Print screen Select te layout you want to prt Check the Preview and cick the Pren bution Pring sists Exif Print SSS la Sordered 44 JU Bordered x2 Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type Photos are arranged in the following o
307. ettings to MP Navigator EX functions gt Preferences Dialog Box L Guide Opens this guide e Edit Tools ily e Select All Selects all images in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 431 of 707 pages e bii Cancel All Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window P Image Correction Enhancement Allows you to correct the target image outlined in orange Click this button to open the Correct Enhance Images window in which you can correct enhance images and also adjust the brightness contrast etc gt Correct Enhance Images Window P important Image correction enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files mi a Zoom in Enlarges the target image outlined in orange You can also enlarge the image by double clicking it You can check all pages when you select a PDF file You can also check file information such as file name date size and security setting A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set s Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files ve Search Enter a word or phrase included in the file name Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for then click A Search For Exif information text in Maker Model Description and User Comment is searched Note Search images in My Box Scanned Imported Images Recently Saved Images or a sele
308. ettings list P important To save the page size orientation and number of copies that was set in each sheet click Options and check each item Note When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver the print settings you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved If a profile is deleted register the print settings again Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1 Select the printing profile to be deleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab 2 Delete the printing profile Click Delete When the confirmation message appears click OK The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Seitings list Note Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used Page 598 of 707 pages Advanced Giitels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used P033 Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate ink cartridge among installed cartridges according to an intended use When one of the ink cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one you c
309. evel into black and white and is rendered in two colors e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 460 of 707 pages Custom Size Setting yeh 850 inches 1 008 50 Height 11 00 inches 1 00 11 65 ures och z P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen e Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents Resolution e Recommended Image Correction Auto Photo Fix Auto Document Fix The displayed item varies by Document Type e Recommended Image Correction This is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode Select this checkbox to apply auto photo fix or auto document fix based on the document type e Auto Photo Fix This is displayed when Document Type is Photo Select this checkbox to automatically analyze the captured scene landscape night scene etc and apply suitable corrections e Auto Document Fix This is displayed when Document Type is Magazine or Document Select this checkbox to sh
310. extracted text into one file General Tab Text displayed in Notepad included with Windows is for guidance only Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals OCR Dialog Box Page 476 of 707 pages Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points at 300 dpi Slanted documents Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation rotated characters Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with narrow line spacing Documents with colors in the background of text Documents containing multiple languages For further procedures refer to the application s manual e Reset Cancels the application setting e Set Allows you to select an application P important Depending on the specified application the text may not be extracted correctly or the application may not start e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One click Mode P important Start scanning by clicking the one click button is not displayed when the dialog box is opened directly from Solution Menu EX e Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes
311. f 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Using Useful Copy Functions gt Copying without Borders Borderless Copy U039 Copying without Borders Borderless Copy You can copy images on photo paper so that they fill the entire page without borders 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load photo paper on the Rear Tray 3 Press the Paper button to select the page size Select the page size according to the paper loaded on the Rear Tray EA Note You can switch the size of paper loaded on the Rear Tray between A4 and Letter Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter When the page size for plain paper is selected borderless copying is not available 4 Press the Fit to Page button The Fit to Page lamp lights up EA Note Tocancel borderless copying press the Fit to Page button again When pressing the Fit to Page button the Fit to Page lamp is off and the borderless copying is canceled You can use the Fit to Page button only when you are using the copy function 5 Specify the number of copies max 20 copies To make 1 to 9 copies or 20 copies Display the desired number of copies on the LED Each time you press the button the number on the LED increases by one When the LED displays as follows the number of copies is set to 20 Press the button again to return to 1 To make 10 to 19 copies 1 Press the bu
312. f copies appears on the LED While copying is in progress the number on the LED flashes and decreases by one to indicate the remaining number of copies to be made Each time you press the button the number on the LED increases by one When F appears the number of copies is set to 20 Press the button again to return to 1 Maintenance Codes To perform maintenance of the machine press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until the desired Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals LED Display and Basic Operations code appears on the LED and then press the Black or Color button Maintenance Code Operation Prints the nozzle check pattern Cleans the Print Head Cleans the Print Head deeply Prints the print head alignment sheet Scans the print head alignment sheet to align the Print Head automatically Prints the current head position adjustment values Cleans the Paper Feed Roller Cleans the inside of the machine Switches the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter This setting is used for making copies Sets the machine to prevent paper abrasion Error Codes See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning
313. f document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly P important Do not place objects on the Document Cover The objects may fall into the machine when the Document Cover is opened This may damage the machine Close the Document Cover when scanning Placing Documents Place documents as described below to allow the machine to detect the document type or size automatically P important When scanning by specifying the document size in MP Navigator EX or ScanGear scanner driver align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen Photos that have been cut to various shapes and documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly For Photos Postcards Business Cards or BD For Magazines Newspapers or Text Documents DVD CD Place the document face down on the Platen and a align an upper corner of the document with the Place the document face down on the Platen with corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen 0 39 inches 1 cm or more space between the Portions placed on the diagonally striped area edges diagonally striped area of the Platen and cannot be scanned the document Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned Placing a Single Document gt gt gt 4 4 A 4 A 4 4 A A A A A 4 i
314. f the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX ZoomBrowser EX or Digital Photo Professional the folder tree area will not be displayed The images selected in the application will be displayed as thumbnails EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 108 of 707 pages 3 Click the image you want to print The number of copies appears as 1 below the clicked image while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click E _ Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click Ey Delete All Imported Images To print two or more copies of an image click a Up arrow until the number of copies you want is reached To reduce the number of copies shown
315. f the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 3 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer If there are any unnecessary print jobs delete them Deleting the Undesired Print Job e Check 4 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in the Print dialog box The machine will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer Make sure that your machine s name is selected in the Print dialog box EA Note To make the machine the one selected by default select Set as Default Printer e Check 5 Configure the printer port appropriately Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately 1 Log on as auser account with administrator privilege 2 Select Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes 3 Right click the Canon XXX Printer icon where XXX is your machine s name then select Printer properties In Windows Vista or Windows XP right click the Canon XXX Printer icon where XXX is your machine s name then select Properties Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Does Not Start Page 631 of 707 pages 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the po
316. f there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the After cleaning the Print Head print pattern and examine the nozzle check pattern Step 2 See Cleaning the Print Head If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice Step 3 See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If the problem is not resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved _ ai Step 4 See Replacing a FINE Cartridge E8 Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 53 of 707 pages If the problem is still not resolved after replacing the FINE Cartridge contact the service center When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned See Aligning the Print Head Note You can also perform the maintenance operations from your computer For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 54 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern C094 m Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles E8 Note f the remaining ink level is low t
317. fected See Image Settings for details and precautions on each function Note See Scanning in Advanced Mode to start the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear and scan Adjusting the image brightness and color tone Set Image Adjustment to Auto Photo Magazine Newspaper or Document according to the document type Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correc Page 509 of 707 pages Sharpening slightly out of focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON ES Note Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect Reducing dust and scratches Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low Medium or High according to the degree of dust and scratches Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast Set Fading Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correc Page 510 of 707 pages Reducing graininess Set Grain Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of graininess Correcting backlit
318. fferent A Transmit the settings Make sure that the machine is on and click Send Click OK when the confirmation message appears The settings are enabled hereafter ES Note Depending on print quality settings effects of the quiet mode may be less Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page 601 of 707 pages NVelielelecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Machine Operation Mode P035 Changing the Machine Operation Mode If necessary switch between various modes of machine operation The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows Custom Settings 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Make sure that the machine is on and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens E8 Note f the machine is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the machine status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Prevent paper abrasion The machine can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high density printing to prevent paper abrasion Check this check box to use this function Align heads manually Usually the Print Head Al
319. folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB P important This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG Exif and Document Type is not Auto Mode This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed ES Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected When you save an image with the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name Example _ mage0001 jpg e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder fi
320. from Your Computer and Media Types You Can Use There are various types of paper paper with special coating on the surface for printing photos with optimal quality and paper suitable for documents Media Type of the printer driver has different settings for each type of paper in advance such as using ink ejecting ink or distance from nozzles so that you can print on each paper with the optimal image quality The Paper button on the Operation Panel which is used for making copies also has some settings similar to Media Type of the printer driver You can print with different settings in Media Type of the printer driver or with the Paper button on the Operation Panel suitable for each type of loaded paper m Use the Stop Reset button to cancel printing Tip Never press the ON button If you press the ON button while printing is in progress the print data sent from the computer queues in the machine and you may not be able to continue to print Press the Stop Reset button to cancel printing ES Note If you cannot cancel printing by pressing the Stop Reset button while printing from a computer open the printer driver setup window to delete the unnecessary print jobs from the printer status monitor m Does the machine need to be handled with care when using or transporting Tip Do not use or transport the machine vertically or slanted If the machine is used or transported vertically or slanted the machine may become d
321. from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout Print screen Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates See your printer manual for details on how to load paper to print on the front back etc Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How Do I Print with Even Margins Page 197 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Do Print with Even Margins A097 Easy PhotoPrint EX How Do I Print with Even Margins When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other depending on the image and printer To always print with even margins select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ot Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Crop the photo to apply even margins individually s gt Cropping Photos Photo Print E Note This setting is available only when Photo Print is selected Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is C1 or C4 Page 198 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Ans
322. ftware gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents S713 MP Navigator EX Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify in the Scan Import window In the Scan Settings dialog box you can make advanced scan settings E Ato Document fx FI Dgscreen F Uraherp Mask Remove gutter shadow E Reduce Showethrough E Corect slanted document E Detect the orjertation of tent documents and ratate rrages Engish ox __Caneet ets e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned Scanning photos Color Photo or Black and White Photo Scanning text documents Color Document Black and White Document or Text OCR Scanning magazines Magazine Color Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK yian 850 inches 1 008 50 Height 11 09 inches 1 00 11 65 Urs P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen You cannot select Auto Detect Multiple Documents or Auto Detect when Document Type is Text OCR
323. g Earme oe a A Page Layout Fttofage 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Fit to Page Printing Page 253 of 707 pages The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Lotier 8 511 4 Orientation la Pora A ngpo Page Layout Fto Page cos e a a Eoo omase acne tore semea Paetaa J J El Ouples Parting Sapie Sde Lorgas saping Leh Spectr Margin Copies 1 0 995 Ci i E Port tom Last Page 7 Colate Cok haa toe ih 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scaled Printing Page 254 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Scaled Printing P005 Scaled Printing The procedure for printing a d
324. g gt Paper Jams gt In Other Cases U353 In Other Cases Make sure of the following e Check 1 Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot e Check 2 Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the machine unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object e Check 3 Is the paper curled Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 641 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen U331 Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed gt Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is
325. g Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with ICC Profiles Page 290 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Printing with ICC Profiles P016 Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile you can print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the data effectively The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data When you print the editing and touch up results of Adobe Photoshop Canon Digital Photo Professional or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data To use this printing method use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself from your application software be sure to select color management items from your application software For instructions refer to the manual
326. g Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used Managing the Machine Power Reducing the Machine Noise Changing the Machine Operation Mode Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Overview of the Printer Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon lJ Preview Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Appendix Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Deleting the Undesired Print Job Sharing the Printer on a Network Canon IJ Printer Driver Page 314 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver P025 Canon lJ Printer Driver The Canon lJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this machine The Canon lJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data t
327. g Tone Curve A Final Review Make a final check of color adjustments The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived from the subsequent image processing will be displayed There are no settings to make in this screen Final Review Ea Charel Master l Z Oije Onek 116 R 19 iR G 19 133 8 w e For a color image select a color in Channel to check either Red Green or Blue or select Master to check three colors together e If you place the cursor on the preview image the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values only L when Color Mode is Grayscale before and after the adjustments will be displayed d Threshold Set the boundary threshold at which black and white are divided By adjusting the threshold level you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers Setting Threshold Custom You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons Select Add Delete from the pull down menu When Color Mode is set to anything but Black and White the Add Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens When Color Mode is Black and White the Add Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens Add Delete Tone Curve Settings Setting Name Tone Curve Settings Ust New Setting Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Adjustment Buttons Page 549 of 707 pages Enter Setting Name and click Add The na
328. g from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites gt Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window A171 Easy PhotoPrint EX Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window In this window you can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to print P important Internet connection is required to use this function Internet connection fees apply This function is supported under Windows XP or later This product uses the Flickr API but is not endorsed or certified by Flickr To display the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window click Import photos from photo sharing sites in the Select Images screen or Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click E Add Image 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area Toolbar 3 Thumbnail Window 4 Selections Area 2 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area Photo Sharing Sites Displays the name of the photo sharing site Search Enter the search text EA Note Alternatively click _ Down arrow to display up to 20 search history records and select among them When you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites W
329. ge e Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle within 0 1 to 10 degrees or 0 1 to 10 degrees of the document P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text Documents with extremely large or small fonts Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures images Hand written documents Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines tables Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document e Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist This function may not work properly depending on the document language Only text documen
330. ger than usual when this checkbox is selected The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan Auto Document Fix may not be effective if the scan area is too small e Fading correction Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast e Backlight correction Corrects photos that have been shot against light e Gutter shadow correction Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets P important For precautions on using this function see Gutter Shadow Correction e Color Pattern Allows you to adjust the image s overall color You can correct colors that have faded due to colorcast etc and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern P important This setting is not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box e Perform Scan e Scan Scanning starts ES Note When scanning starts the progress will be displayed Click Cancel to cancel the scan e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan preview settings m Preferences Dialog Box e Close Closes ScanGear Toolbar e Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view In thumbnail view 6_ aaan d g Ea SaF aa AM OO 59 In whole image view T yia x 3 aaa E
331. ges Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 414 of 707 pages Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Page 415 of 707 pages Related Topic Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan Page 416 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan S745 Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify in the Scan Import window gt Specty adwanced settings for scanning phates and doorrerts Document Type E Recommended image Comecton Descreen Uraharp Mask Remove gutter shadow Reduce Showthrough Corect started document Detect the orertation of text documents and ntate Fnages e Document Type Auto Mode is set P important Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents e Recommended Image Correction Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type P important When this checkbox is selected the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take longer than usual when thi
332. ground Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application Click Search backgrounds to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds When Single color Is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK eS Change Background Background Type Select from samples Single color Image file No background Backaround Color Standard color Dj ine Custom color Customize C Apply to all paces When Image file Is Selected Set Image File Path and Image Layout then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 219 of 707 pages Changing Background Select from samples Single color Image file No background Imace File Path C Users UserNameIMG0032_s jpa E Semitransparent Transparency 10 10 90 image Layout Crop to fit pace Auto scale to ft page Tile Original size E Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Page 220 of 707 pages Adding Photos Page 221 of 707 pages WelFi
333. gs Dialog Box Scanner Button Settings Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Opening Images Saved on a Computer Scanning with Other Application Software What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting Histogram Adjusting Tone Curve Setting Threshold ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Basic Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons Auto Scan Mode Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 83 of 707 pages Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting Cropping Frames Resolution File Formats Color Matching Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Copying Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Copying Making Copies Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Using U
334. gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Text to Photos A090 Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos Click E Add Text in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text EA Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Tee Postion d Sue Colors amp Lines Amanoy of prar Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text then click OK Note Inthe Edit Text Box dialog box you can change the position angle and size of the text You can also set the color and line of the text box See Help for details To change the entered text select the text box and click all Edit Text Box The Edit Text Box dialog box appears You can change the text Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Page 234 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Saving A091 mr Saving You can save edited items Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen ES Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create
335. gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings A102 Other Settings s Changing Layout gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving gt Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display sb Opening Saved Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Layout Page 215 of 707 pages AJS Gites Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Layout A080 g Easy PhotoPrint EX KE Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen then click Es Change Layout Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK Album paan alge selas ala P important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased
336. gt Scanned Image Does Not Open S934 Scanned Image Does Not Open Check If the file format is not supported by the application scan the image again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG For details refer to the application s manual If you have any questions contact the manufacturer of the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP Navigator EX Problems Page 665 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems S940 MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size s gt Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Page 666 of 707 pages AJEA Si Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Cannot Scan at the Correct Size S941 Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen Placing Documents Check 2 Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again If the matching size is not found scan at a larger size and trim the image See the Toolbar oO Trimming in Correct Enhance Images Window for details Page top Downloaded from Manu
337. hat you normally select this setting e High Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast This can affect the tone of the image P important You can set Fading Correction after preview You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Fading Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small e Grain Correction Use this function to reduce graininess roughness in photos taken with high speed or sensitized film e None Graininess will not be reduced e Low Select this when the photo is slightly grainy e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this when the photo is very grainy This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the image P important Grain Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small e Backlight Correction Use this function to correct photos that have been shot against light When you change the Backlight Correction setting the result will be reflected in the preview image e None Backlight correction will not be applied e Low Select this to correct slightly backlit photos This will not affect the image contrast e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this to correct strongly backlit photos This can affect the image contrast P important You can set Backlight Correction after preview You can set this setting when Reco
338. he check box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 244 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 245 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order P001 Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab specify the number of copies to be printed TR aak Senp E Man B Page Sere gf Btecte Af Martenance El Pope Sue Lotier 85x117 Bl amp Onertation A Poses A Landrcape Rete 180 degrees 3 Same as Page Size Page Layout Noenalsize arr a E a g S aaa m 0O V Atoreatically souca large documert that the perter carrot otot Duplex Parting Staple Sde Lengad sapling Let Spect Maran Prag Options Stame Bactuground Oetauts Cox coca tee Glo 3 Specify the print order Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order and uncheck the check box
339. he document 2 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 3 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 4 Execute print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing This Manual Page 92 of 707 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents are printed P important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents Before printing be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate However if the print data extends outside the paper because of the new zoom rate that portion of the document will not be printed on the paper Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 93 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Using Keywords to Find a Document Using Keywords to Find a Document You can enter a keyword to search for a target document All documents in the currently displayed on screen manual are searched _ Copyrg Doarerts _ Copying Photos _ Feto Page Copying _ Saving Scanned Data on the Computer __ Pertng Photos Eas PhatoPrre ED _ Preng Deourerts L Prrting Web
340. he nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low See Replacing a FINE Cartridge You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Press the j Maintenance button to display A 2 Press the Black or Color button The nozzle check pattern will be printed 5 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern O 0 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 55 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern C095 m Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and clean the Print Head if necessary 1 Check if there are missing lines in the pattern 1 or horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 1 fits na va x a 1 Check if lines are missing in this pattern If yes the cleaning is required See Cleaning the Print Head A Good B Bad lines are missing 2 Check if horizontal white streaks are present in this pattern If yes the cleaning is required See Cleaning the Print Head A B
341. he previous page to display the previous page Click b gt Go to the next page to display the next page Alternatively enter a page number in the page number entry box and click View to display the page The number of search results images may be small depending on the language of the search text In that case entering English search text may increase search results 5 Select the image s you want to download The selected image s is are displayed in the Selections area Note You can select up to 300 images Click Cancel all image selections to cancel all image selections in the Selections area Click u Cancel image selection to cancel the selection of images selected in the Selections area 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save Selected Images When the Save Selected Image Save Selected Images dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save The selected images are saved ES Note To save only the images you like select them in the Selections area and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save Selected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for saving downloaded images 7 Click Exit P important The search results images will be deleted if you exit before saving them Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 190 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printin
342. he selected image area click in Delete All Imported Images EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 119 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Editing A024 Easy PhotoPrint EX lt 6 Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears G J Ede atom a5 needed Insert text add mages or change layout Create Album een neoe as Ss j z apra D Select Images ESEN Edit General Toos Cee lip 4 2 Edit your album if necessary b Changing Layout gt Changing Background Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited album It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover Downloaded from Ma
343. he stamp in the preview window To change the stamp position angle type a value in the Orientation box directly 5 Save the stamp Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 6 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1 Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Stamp Page 271 of 707 pages Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp Background Stamp dialog box and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list 2 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens 3 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4 Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab When you want to save the stamp with a different title type a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp 1 Click Define Stamp in the Stamp Background Stamp dialog box The Stamp Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the stamp to be deleted Select the title of the stamp you want to delet
344. he subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image Show through Removal Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 176 of 707 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Page 177 of 707 pages Removes show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect Advanced Opens the Advanced Adjustment dialog box in which you can make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone For Brightness Contrast and Tone select a color in Channel to adjust either Red Green or Blue or select Master to adjust three colors together Brightness Contrast Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image Move the Brightness slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Move the Contrast slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Tone Adjust the brightness balance by specifying Highlight the brightest level Shadow the darkest level and Midtone the color in the middle of Highlight and Shadow Move the H
345. heck box and then click Send To open the printer driver setup window see Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window e Check 5 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 624 of 707 pages and become wavy causing paper abrasion e When printing from your computer Reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again 1 Open the printer driver setup window Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window R Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer driver setup window quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Manual for Color Intensity and then click Set 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity Check 6 Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink Resize your original document in your application software Printing Area Check 7 Is the Platen Glass dirty Clean the Platen Glass gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Check 8 Is the Paper Feed Roller dirty Clean the Paper Feed Roller
346. hen follow the on screen instructions e Changing the confirmation screen setting 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows 7 or Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Uninstall a program e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs Note In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting up software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account follow the on screen instructions 2 Select Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 3 Select Change If you select Yes after you have followed the on screen instructions the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey If you select No the information will be sent automatically ES Note If you select Uninstall or Remove the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled Follow the on screen instructions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals For Windows Users Page 645 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt For Windows Users U333 For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed e Check Is the printer status monitor enabled Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printe
347. his s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays s gt Saving Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Calendars Page 124 of 707 pages b Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 125 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A041 OEE Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seler the Ram you wart to create from the manu Seber LORY Co access saved tems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 126 of 707 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the
348. how to flatten curled paper refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Load paper pap 1 Open the Paper Support raise it then tip it back 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 37 of 707 pages Loading Paper 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the paper in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the paper stack Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The paper may not be fed properly 4 gt Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation B Loading paper in the landscape orientation C can cause paper jams N B C Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 38 of 707 pages Loading Paper Page 39 of 707 pages E Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark D E9 Note The machine may make operating noise when feeding paper After loading paper When copying select the size and type of the loaded paper using the Operation Panel on the machine See Copying When printing with a computer select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Envelopes Page 40 of 707 pages Ba
349. ht Switch Aspect Ratio However ce Switch Aspect Ratio is not available when Output Size is Flexible Creating Multiple Cropping Frames In thumbnail view You can only create one cropping frame per image In whole image view Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in the Preview area The new cropping frame will be the Active Cropping Frame and the old cropping frame will be the Unselected Cropping Frame Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 563 of 707 pages You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames When you create a new cropping frame it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame ES Note Create up to 12 cropping frames Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected Deleting Cropping Frames In thumbnail view To delete a cropping frame click an area outside the cropping frame on an image In whole image view To delete a cropping frame select it and click bnan Remove Cropping Frame on the Toolbar Alternatively press the Delete key When there are
350. humbnail on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly Documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver gt Placing Documents Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver N Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen ENEE Gy Y Ovipet See Fenbe J bwet espectrate C Adjest cropping frames Image corrections Fading corrector E9 Note Toscan magazines containing many color photos select Magazine Color 3 Click Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Basic Mode Page 498 of 707 pages Preview image appears in the Preview area Q wet sone Note Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source Set Destination o Set Output Size Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination 6 Adjust the scan area cropping frame as required Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame scan area on the preview image gt Adjusting Cropping Frames 7 Set Image corrections as required 8 Click Scan
351. ic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head Deeply C097 m Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head clean the Print Head deeply Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Press the j Maintenance button repeatedly until y appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The machine starts cleaning the Print Head deeply Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes 3 Check the print head condition When the deep cleaning is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode To check the print head condition print the nozzle check pattern See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern If the problem is not resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved replace the FINE Cartridge with a new one See Replacing a FINE Cartridge If the problem is still not resolved after replacing the FINE Cartridge contact the service center 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 58 of 707 page
352. ic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print each page of the album on a full page without borders You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 122 of 707 pages 3 Click Print Ee Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Calendars Page 123 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars A040 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try T
353. ick You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon Custom Scan with One click Tab ecm Switch Mode Switches to One click Mode screen In the One click Mode screen you can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon s gt One click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions s gt Preferences Dialog Box Co Opens this guide Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 405 of 707 pages Navigation Mode Screen Page 406 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Import Documents or Images Tab Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Import Documents or Images Tab S702 MP Navigator EX Scan Import Documents or Images Tab Select Scan Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan Import Documents or Images tab Scan photos and documents Scan Import Documents or Images Auto Scan Photos Documents Platen o gt E Show fit window af tatup TT Proterences Auto Scan
354. ick button C a Cancel stots sm Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Yieh 850 inches 1 008 50 Kogt 11 00 inches 1 00 11 65 ures oh z Gak on e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals OCR Dialog Box Page 475 of 707 pages Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen Specify Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen EA Note When scanning slanted documents select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve the text recognition accuracy Save Settings File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP
355. ient systems is as follows If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems For installation instructions see Installing the MP Drivers ES Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation 2 Start the wizard e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers gt Add a printer e f you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Network gt Add Printer The Add Printer window appears 3 Add a printer Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next EA Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish e f you are using Windows 7 the icon for the shared printer will be created in the Devices and Printers window e f you are using Windows Vista the icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers window The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network If you are using Windows XP 1 Install
356. ies the printing range Select All under normal circumstances To reprint only a specific page select Pages and enter the page number you want to print To specify multiple pages enter the page numbers by separating them with commas or by entering a hyphen between the page numbers ES Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be divided into several pages during printing After all poster pages have been printed paste the pages together to create a poster Printing Only Specific Pages If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing you can reprint only the specific pages by following the procedure below 1 Set the print range In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab click the pages that do not need to be printed The pages that were clicked are deleted and only the pages to be printed are displayed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Poster Printing DR ack Setup E Man B Page Setup uf tects fj Martenance El age Sre Letter 85x117 4 Orientation la Porat A Langecape Rotate 190 degrees B Pirta Peper Sae Letter 8511 z a H 8 Bordedess Fttofage Scaled Pagelyot EA g Ga Spocty j Long ede taping Leh d Specty Margn A z yw i Part tom Last Page 0k kama too Hee EA Note Click the deleted
357. ighlight Input brightness Adjusting Tone Curve In Select Tone Curve select a tone curve from No correction Overexposure Underexposure High contrast Reverse the negative positive image and Edit custom curve No correction No adjustment Overexposure Convex curve The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side resulting ina bright toned image when viewed on a monitor Underexposure Concave curve The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side resulting in a dark toned image when viewed on a monitor High contrast S curve The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced resulting in a high contrast image Reverse the negative positive image Downward sloping line The input and output sides are reversed resulting in a negative positive inverted image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Tone Curve Page 522 of 707 pages Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Threshold Page 523 of 707 pages WelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Setting Threshold 307 Setting Threshold The brightness of col
358. ighlight slider to the left to brighten the image Move the Midtone slider to the left to brighten and right to darken the image Move the Shadow slider to the right to darken the image Color Balance Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image Move the Color Balance slider to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color Note These are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white Defaults Resets all adjustments Close Closes the Advanced Adjustment dialog box Note The Brightness and Contrast values set in Adjust do not change even if the brightness and Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 178 of 707 pages color tone are adjusted in the Advanced Adjustment dialog box Defaults Resets each adjustment brightness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image
359. ignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head alignment but you can change it to manual head alignment If the printing results are unsatisfactory even after you execute automatic head alignment see Aligning the Print Head Position and execute manual head alignment Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment Uncheck this check box to perform the automatic head alignment Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the machine rest time until printing of the next page begins Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries increase the ink drying wait time Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing 4 Transmit the settings Click Send and click OK when the confirmation message appears The machine operates with the modified settings hereafter Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Troubleshooting Page 602 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs gt The Machine Cannot Be Powered On s gt An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED LED Cannot Be Seen At All Cannot Install the MP Drivers s gt Cannot Install the Application Program s gt Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly s Print Results Not Satisfactory
360. iles ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for adjusted images 6 Click Exit P important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 174 of 707 pages WA titel Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Correct Enhance Images Window A068 Easy PhotoPrint EX Correct Enhance Images Window You can correct enhance images in this window To display the Correct Enhance Images window click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print RedEye Conecton Face Shspene Diptal Face Smoothing C Uters UserName sanpled3 jpg Selected 3 1 Task Area 2 Toolbar 1 Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click the Auto or Manual tab to display the corresponding tab Auto Tab Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window 22 Correct Enhance Images o S ae C Users UserNamelsamphed3jpg Selected 3 Auto Photo Fix Appli
361. iles See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Attachment Settings e Mail Program Specify an e mail software program Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Mail Dialog Box Page 473 of 707 pages Select Add to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e mail software program If the e mail software program you want to use is not listed click Add to List and select it Select Mail Program Select a mal progracs from the kt None Atach Manuaty Addo la Ox Cancel e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One click Mode P important Start scanning by clicking the one click button is n
362. ill Images from Videos Page 182 of 707 pages Display the Auto Frame Capture Settings area then use ZAN Set start time Set end time in the Preview area to specify the time range In the Auto Frame Capture Settings area select a capture method and click Capture You can correct the captured still images in the Correct Captured Frames window To display the Correct Captured Frames window select the image s you want to correct in the Captured frame s area then click Correct image When the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX you can print the captured still images To print specify the printer and media in the Print area then click Print When you print from the Movie Print window images are automatically cropped Therefore images will be printed with the left and right sides cut off If you want to adjust the cropping area before printing save the captured still image and print it from a function of Easy PhotoPrint EX The saved still images can be used along with other images to create albums calendars etc in Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Page 183 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window A161 Easy PhotoPrint EX Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window You can capture vid
363. ill be applied to all the cropping frames Sonen Remove Cropping Frame Removes the selected cropping frame 1 Information Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings document type etc 6 Open Guide This page appears Preview Area e Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview You can also check the results of the settings image corrections color adjustments etc made in Settings and Operation Buttons When Zaj Thumbnail is displayed on the Toolbar Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 529 of 707 pages Basic Mode Tab Page 530 of 707 pages Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned E8 Note When multiple images are previewed different outlines indicate different selection status Focus Frame thick blue outline The displayed settings will be applied Selected Frame thin blue outline The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key Unselected no outline The settings will not be applied Double click a frame to zoom in on the image Click Frame Advance at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame Double click the frame again to return the display to its non magnified state a When Whole Image is
364. images Set Backlight Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of backlight Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of shadows Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 511 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern S301 Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in ScanGear scanner driver s Basic Mode tab aHa Color Adjustment Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 512 of 707 pages Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color Cyan amp red magenta amp green and yellow amp blue are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color It is re
365. ime they are saved and cannot be returned to their original state JPEG is not available for black and white images Exif Standard File Extension jpg A file format supported by many digital cameras It adds information such as the date of image capture camera model shutter speed shooting mode and comments to JPEG files The file format version must be Exif 2 2 or later in order to print on a Direct Print compatible printer TIFF Standard File Extension tif A file format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications Some TIFF files are incompatible TIFF is suitable for editing saved images EA Note MP Navigator EX supports the following TIFF file formats Uncompressed black and white binary Uncompressed RGB 8 bits per channel Uncompressed YCC 8 bits per component Uncompressed RGB 16 bits per channel Uncompressed YCC 16 bits per component Uncompressed Grayscale PDF Standard File Extension pdf A file format developed by Adobe Systems It can be used on various computers and operating systems Therefore PDF files can be exchanged between people who use different operating systems fonts etc regardless of the differences P important Only PDF files created with MP Navigator EX are supported PDF files created or edited in other applications are not supported Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Matching Pag
366. in Notepad included with Windows When you click this icon the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings gt OCR Dialog Box e Custom Scan documents photos and open them in a specified application The document type can be automatically detected When you click this icon the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings gt Custom Dialog Box e gt E switch Mode Switches to Navigation Mode The Navigation Mode screen appears gt Custom Scan with One click Tab e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals One click Mode Screen Page 451 of 707 pages Preferences Dialog Box o L Guide Opens this guide P important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save dialog box or Custom dialog box When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data specify Document Type do not select Auto Mode Related Topic Easy Scanning with One click Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 452 of 707 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Auto Scan Dialog Box S742 Auto Scan Dialog Box Click Auto Scan on the Custom S
367. indow Page 191 of 707 pages Sort by Select how to sort the search results in the Thumbnail window Select Popularity or Date You cannot change the setting after a search Number of Results per Page Select the number of images displayed in the Thumbnail window from 10 20 and 30 You cannot change the setting after a search License Type Select the license type of images to search for from All types CC license Non Commercial and CC license Others Select All types to display all images regardless of license type Select CC license Non Commercial to display CC licensed images that can be used for non commercial purposes only Select CC license Others to display other CC licensed images ES Note license type License Type All types CC license Non Commercial License Type All Rights Reserved Attribution Non Commercial CC license Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives CC license Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike CC license Attribution CC license Attribution No Derivatives CC license Attribution Share Alike CC license Attribution Non Commercial CC license Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives CC license Attribution Non Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals a License type varies by image Point to an image to display a tooltip in which you can check the Usage Precautions Conditions Comply with the following condition
368. ine cannot print unless both the Color and Black FINE Cartridges are installed Be sure to install both the FINE Cartridges 6 Liftthe Scanning Unit Cover slightly to set the Scanning Unit Support back to its original position and gently close the Scanning Unit Cover Caution When setting the Scanning Unit Support back to its original position be sure to hold the Scanning Unit Cover firmly and be careful not to get your fingers caught E8 Note f the Alarm lamp lights or flashes orange after the Scanning Unit Cover is closed refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide When you start printing after replacing the FINE Cartridge the machine starts cleaning the Print Head automatically Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the Print Head f printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Checking the Ink Status Page 65 of 707 pages bie Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing a FINE Cartridge gt Checking the Ink Status co092 mw Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status with the Ink lamps on the Operation Panel or with the computer screen E8 Note The ink level detector is mounted on the machine to detect the remaining ink level The machine con
369. ing gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 150 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Editing A154 Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede Grout orint elements as needed Insert taxt add kragas or change layout Edit Tools Bea AE alege 2 Edit the layout if necessary s gt Changing Layout Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again s gt Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen 9 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 151 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 152 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Printing A155 Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings
370. ing Images gt Scanning Images Before Scanning s gt Placing Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Page 331 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images gt Scanning Images U046 Scanning Images You can scan images from the machine and save them to a computer easily In addition you can scan images with advanced settings from a computer using application software Select the scanning method according to your purpose s gt Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine s gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software s gt Scanning with Other Application Software Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Before Scanning Page 332 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images gt Before Scanning U047 Before Scanning Make sure that the original to be scanned meets the requirements for an original to be set on the Platen Glass Refer to Placing Documents for requirements and how to load the original on the Platen Glass Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Placing Documents Page 333 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images gt Placing Documents S005 Placing Documents Learn how to place documents on the machine s Platen Place documents correctly according to the type o
371. ing graphics or photos with intense colors continuously over a period of time the machine may stop printing to protect the Print Head In this case printing will not resume automatically Turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes Caution The Print Head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the machine Never touch the Print Head or nearby components Check 2 Is the paper loaded Make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray If the machine has run out of paper load paper Check 3 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations As printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the machine and the computer to process the machine may appear to have stopped operating In addition when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper the machine may pause temporarily In either case wait until the process is complete EA Note f you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document printing may pause to allow the ink to dry Check 4 If copying stops before it is completed try to copy again If a certain time passes after some errors occurred while copying the machine stops the operation Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Page 633 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Machine Moves But I
372. ings Paper Sze At m F Ooubie page abum Onentaton Porat AJO Lanesage Meage number Settngs Cover Fraez amp Back Options Samole Layout Srrole Front Cover Inside Pages Back Cover 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number E8 Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the Cover Options dialog box To display the Cover Options dialog box select Front or Front amp Back for Cover and click Options Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout consisting of two page master In a double page album you can arrange an image across the left and right pages You can customize the page numbers position font size etc in the Page Number Settings dialog box To display the Page Number Settings dialog box select the Page number checkbox and click Settings You can customize the margins of the front cover inside pages and back cover in the Margin Settings dialog box To display the Margin Settings dialog box click Margins 3 Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 116 of 707 pages 4 If you want to change the layout click Layout The Change Layout dialog box appears In th
373. int by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data effectively select ICM or ICC Profile Matching When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile select None The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set TR aak Setup Man E3 Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance Meda Tipe Pian Paper i Paper Source Rear Tey The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Specifying Color Correction Page 286 of 707 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction ICM ICC Profile Matching Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing Specify the input profile to be used None The printer driver does not perform color correction Select this value when you are specifying an in
374. inting Page 110 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Printing A014 Printing 1 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Select the layout you want t pirit Check the Preview and cick the Prin bution Printing starts Exif Print S amp SBaai mL Sorcered KE m0 m Sorceress Borcered xz 2 Ll i P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select a layout you want to use Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer paper size and media type 3 Click Print P important The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again gt Saving Photos When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing gt How Do Print with Even Margins ES No
375. ion Folded curled or wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper that is too thin weighing less than 17 Ib 64 g m 2 Paper that is too thick weighing more than 28 Ib 105 g m except for Canon genuine paper Paper thinner than a postcard including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size when printing on paper smaller than A5 Picture postcards Postcards affixed with photos or stickers Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive Any type of paper with holes Paper that is not rectangular Paper bound with staples or glue Paper with adhesives Paper decorated with glitter etc 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Originals Page 48 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Originals C077 Loading Originals m Loading Originals m Originals You Can Load m Loading Originals Load originals to copy or scan on the Platen Glass gt Important After loading the original be sure to close the Document Cover before starting to copy or scan When scanning from a computer using a software application you need to load the original in a different way For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 1 Load an original on the Platen Glass 1 Open the Document Cover gt Importa
376. ions PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files as separate PDF files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Settings Dialog Box Page 427 of 707 pages Nelieiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt PDF Settings Dialog Box 736 PDF Settings Dialog Box In the PDF Settings dialog box you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files PDF Settings Ea F Enable keyword gearch Document Language Engish z
377. is selected the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing When High Resolution Paper T Shirt Transfers or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab you cannot perform borderless printing When Borderless is selected the Printer Paper Size Duplex Printing Staple Side settings and the Stamp Background Stamp button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable Depending on the type of the media used during borderless printing the print quality may deteriorate at the top and bottom of the sheet or stains may form When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used In this case crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size Note When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab borderless printing is not recommended and therefore the message for media selection appears When you are using plain paper for test printing select Plain Paper and click OK Expanding the Range of the Document to Print Setting a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems However the portion of the document extending off the paper range will not be printed Subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed Try borderless printing once When you are not satisfied with the result of bord
378. iseramelyl_6oot MOV Selected 3 Sort by Tene Exit 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area 2 Preview Area 3 Captured Frame s Area 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Print Area You can print the captured still images Print Media Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy II Page Size 4 x6 10x15cm Print Settings Note a This function is available only when the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX Media Type Displays the media type specified in the Print Settings dialog box Page Size Displays the paper size specified in the Print Settings dialog box Print Settings Displays the Print Settings dialog box in which you can make the basic print settings select printer media etc Print Starts printing the still images selected in the Captured frame s area Auto Frame Capture Settings Area You can capture multiple still images according to the settings Auto Frame Capture Settings A Start time 0 00 00 00 End time 0 00 15 00 Total captures 10 9 10 framefs v Note m Use vja Down arrow Up arrow to show hide the Auto Frame Capture Settings area Start time End time Displays the start end time of the time range from which to capture still images Total captures Displays the number of still images to be captured Capture Method Select from All frames frame s sec int
379. isfactory Check 2 Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed securely ink may not be ejected correctly Open the Scanning Unit Cover open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover When you close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place e Check 3 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge e Check 4 When a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink replace it with a new one e Check 5 When using paper with one printable surface make sure that the paper
380. isplayed on the LED ES Note If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above adjust the print head position manually from the computer Aligning the Print Head Position To print the current head position adjustment values display the LED as follows then press the Black or Color button Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 583 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads s Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers s gt Aligning the Print Head Position sb Checking the Print Head Nozzles s Cleaning Inside the Machine Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Heads Page 584 of 707 pages ydvancedGmde Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads P026 Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print even though there is enough ink The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows Cleaning 1 Open the printer driver setup window N Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens
381. it screen then click 2l Free Rotate and drag a corner of the image to rotate it See Help for details on the position and size of images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cropping Photos Page 226 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Cropping Photos A086 Easy PhotoPrint EX CS Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Oraz the portion within the white frome onto the area to crop Drag any square on the frame to resize the cropping area Clear Crop Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK Note See Help for details on cropping Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Framing Photos Page 227 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Framing Photos A087 Framing Photos You can add frames to i
382. items An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range Enter a value within the setting range ES Note For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image see Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab Preferences dialog box E9 Invert aspect ratio This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible Click this button to rotate the cropping frame Click again to return it to the original orientation e Adjust cropping frames You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area If an area is not specified the document will be scanned at the document size Auto Crop If an area is specified only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned gt Adjusting Cropping Frames e Image corrections Allows you to apply corrections to images P important Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source Auto Document Fix Fading correction and Backlight correction are available when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 528 of 707 pages e Auto Document Fix Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability P important When this checkbox is selected in ScanGear scanner driver started from MP Navigator EX the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take lon
383. justs the overall image brightness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image Show through Removal Removes show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect Advanced Opens the Advanced Adjustment dialog box in which you can make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone For Brightness Contrast and Tone select a color in Channel to adjust either Red Green or Blue or select Master to adjust three colors together Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 445 of 707 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Advanced Adjustment Metter e Brightness Contrast Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image Move the Brightness s
384. k Setup tab Setting Borderless Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set borderless printing Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab DR ak Setup E Main 3 Pace Setup af Efecte Aj Martensnce z El Pape Sze Letter 8 5x11 Ei amp Onertation A Porat A unce Click OK when the confirmation message appears When a message prompting you to change the media type appears select a media type from the list and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Execute Borderless Printing Page 250 of 707 pages 3 Check the paper size Check the Page Size list When you want to change select another page size from the list The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing 4 Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper and moving the slider to the left decreases the amount It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases if Q H P important When you set the slider at the rightmost position the back side of the paper may become smudged 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the data is printed without any margins on the paper P important When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing
385. l using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider Apply to all images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 175 of 707 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Automatically corrects enhances all images displayed in the thumbnail list OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced image the selected one Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab There are two menus on the Manual tab Adjust and Correct Enhance Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas Adjust 2 Comec enhance Imega Manual excites id CA Uters UserName samph03 jpg Selected 3 Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of t
386. lable for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Brightener Function Page 161 of 707 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Brightener Function A062 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background EA Note You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix If the correction had not been made sufficiently applying Face Brightener function is recommended gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears owe RedEye Conector 22 Face Shypenar oS Diptal Face Smocthing r 7 moel pg morlo x C Users UserNameisamplel jpg Selected 3 E8 Note aa You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to corre
387. lace the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver gt Placing Documents s gt Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver N Click the Advanced Mode tab The Advanced Mode tab appears o Descreen oF owg e a toon Preferences oe Note Settings are not retained when you switch modes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 500 of 707 pages 3 Set Input Settings s gt Input Settings 4 Click Preview Preview image appears in the Preview area Deane S N BERRI Settings OA Reson 1 Ove Stet Mexbie S 47 5 m Dots Seer Note f you scan without preview the show through reduction function will be active This function is useful when scanning magazines However when scanning photos the color tone of the scanned image may differ from the source due to the show through reduction function In that case use preview first 5 Set Output Settings gt Output Settings 6 Adjust the cropping frame scan area correct image and adjust colors as required gt Adjusting Cropping Frames gt Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons 7 Click Scan Starts scanning ES Note Click T Information to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings document type etc ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanni
388. lance slightly The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform No adjustment Adjust color balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Color Balance Page 295 of 707 pages 3 Adjust color balance There are individual sliders for Cyan Magenta and Yellow Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left For example when cyan becomes weaker the color red becomes stronger You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver After adjusting each color click OK Manual Color Adjustment fo Color Adustnert Matching ABCDEF aP 1234567 eres Nomai Sample Type oO
389. le name and Exif information Save Dialog Box EA Note To set passwords for PDF files select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information After scanning you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 458 of 707 pages Application Settings Open with You can select whether to open the View amp Use window or Explorer after saving the images Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One click Mode Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings When Save as type is Auto a confirmation appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 459 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen S734 MP Navigator EX Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen
390. lect next action Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed Scanning is completed Select the action you prefer to take Retouh and save the mage Gore ScanGear dalog Stan othe images Do net dese ScanGear E Oo not desplay tis dalog ogan You may modify this setting on Scan tab of Preferences disiog Cx E8 Note Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set some applications may not support it Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Settings Tab Page 558 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Color Settings Tab S811 Color Settings Tab On the Color Settings tab you can specify the following settings Scanner Preview Scan Color Settings Recommended Color Matching e Color Adjustment Select either of the following You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale e Recommended Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen It is recommended that you normally select this setting e Color Matching Select this to automatically match the scanner monitor and color printer colors thus reducing time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors Color Adjustment Buttons will be disabled This function is a
391. lesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Photos A082 ri E Adding Photos You can add images to pages Select the page you want to add photos to in the Edit screen then click E Add Image EA Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create ov a i ea INGODD0_sjo INGOOD1_sicg ING0109_sjo9 Edit Took aSa YW 1 INGNAN tina INGANNI tina INGNNTS tina E a EA D Next fare Fa le Same page DE Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add Image dialog box and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right EA Note Click an image to select it background turns blue or deselect it background turns white You can also select multiple images You can also use still images captured from videos Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites oh S D Select an option for Add to and click OK P important You can add up to 20 images at one time You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time Add it one at a time L a Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all page
392. let P important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab When Booklet is selected Duplex Printing Staple Side Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable ES Note The stamp and background are not printed on the inserted blank sheets with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Duplex Printing Page 264 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Duplex Printing P007 Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab oaan 3B Pape Sas aA Etec ad a El Pope Sue Letier 85x117 gt a Onentation la O Porat A unce P Rete 180 degrees a of Same as Page Size X Page Layout Nomssre Sea a E hee Geen te Sd Pa le Ga m V Aatomatically seduce large document that the perter carrot ouput Stevie Sde Long side stapling Lett Specty Margin 3 Select the layout Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from
393. lider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Move the Contrast slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image e Tone Adjust the brightness balance by specifying Highlight the brightest level Shadow the darkest level and Midtone the color in the middle of Highlight and Shadow Move the Highlight slider to the left to brighten the image Move the Midtone slider to the left to brighten and right to darken the image Move the Shadow slider to the right to darken the image e Color Balance Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image Move the Color Balance slider to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color Note These are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white e Defaults Resets all adjustments e Close Closes the Advanced Adjustment dialog box Note The Brightness and Contrast values set in Adjust do not change even if the brightness and color tone are adjus
394. lity etc using MP Navigator EX 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX a You can also select images saved on a computer s gt Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Print then click Print Document on the list D o Son Fae J v Doumer mayri Selected 2 v Others mapet elcid 2 einiino con gt ror Tey rez w Prin me j ae EE Eiks 0001 bo ii op Oms 00g 145_0004 pp Pret Photo Port Albure Send P EdivConvort Jue to Man Mere _ Cher Uuerhame Dare Raver PAMO DMSO jeg P important f a password protected PDF file is selected you will be prompted to enter the password gt Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files 3 Specify print settings as required In the displayed dialog box specify print count quality scale etc s gt Print Document Dialog Box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Page 390 of 707 pages av Canon NO Nawigatce EX x Prirtor Papo Source O Crapicae Prrting C Preview betcee pinting P important At normal size 100 some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped In that case select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size 4 Click Print Starts printing Note When printing a multipl
395. llate Part Options Samp Background Defauts Sox Goes Geen Gea e Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box 4 El Foge Sze a Onertation A Porat A ungego k M Rotate 180 degrees ED Portar Poper Sae Letter 85x11 gt Page Layout Sosed mean S 3 8 A Eisses eten Seen erin Sd Para a Sannin Duplex Parting Lorg ede stapling Leh Specty Margin Copes P 1 1 999 ihe gi E Port iom Last Page Collate Pact Options aame tacana Omas C cance too Hee The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the specified scale P important When the application software which you created the original has the scaled printing function configure the settings on your application software You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver When Scaled is selected the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable when Duplex Printing is not selected Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 255 of 707 pages Scaled Printing Page 256 of 707 pages Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page Layout
396. lots U316 Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Has Ink Blots POOOOO OOO OOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOR Printed Paper Curls e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion You can confirm the intensity using the printer driver Adjusting Intensity e Check 3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color we recommend using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper s gt Loading Paper Originals Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 622 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched U317 Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Ils Smudged 2ODO00 0000000000000 900 OOOO DODO OOOOOOOOOOONN Printed Surface Is Scratched e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2
397. lsers lserhiane Pictures MP Navigator EA20M0_01_01 l Browse Hene 001_NEW Save as hype POF QAApie Pages z a Password socurty settings E Save to a Subfolder wth Curert Date The Password Security Settings dialog box opens ES Note You can also open the Password Security Settings dialog box by clicking Set then selecting Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box PDF Settings se F Enabie keyword gearch Dooumert Language Engish Detect the otertation of text documerts and ratate rtogts Correct darted doournert POF Compressor Senda 2 Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox then enter a password Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 399 of 707 pages Password Settings Coroztiity Acrobat 5 0 and lzer Enayption Level High 128 b2 RIC4 Require a parsword to open the decumert Decurrert Open Password Permissions Use a password to restrict printing and editing of the document and ts socurty setings Peenissors Password Porting Mewed Nene Changes Alowed None P important Up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password Passwords are case sensitive Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password You cannot u
398. lution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on the Advanced Mode tab Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the resolution of the scanned image If you set Output Resolution to 300 dpi and scan at twice the size the document will be automatically scanned at 600 dpi and the resolution of the scanned image will be 300 dpi You can print the document with sufficient quality using a 600 dpi color printer When Printing L Size 3 5 inches x 5 inches 89 mm x 127 mm Photos at Twice the Size Document resolution 300 Scan at twice the size Image resolution printing resolution dpi Actual scanning resolution 600 300 dpi Output resolution 300 dpi dpi Scale 200 Appropriate Resolution Settings Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image EA Note Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear it is recommended that you scan at the default value For displaying on a monitor 150 dpi For printing 300 dpi When Output Size is set to Flexible in ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab Select Source is Platen and the scale is 100 Color Mode Output Resolution Color photo Copying Color 300 dpi Printing Creating a postcard 300 dpi Using on a website or attaching Color 75 dpi 150 dpi to e mail hoto 4 Using on a website or attaching Grayscale 75 dpi 150 dpi to e mail Text
399. ly correct red eyes when printing To correct automatically select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and select the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears RedEye Conecton owe gt 22 Face Shspene Diptal Face Smoothing En C Users UserName boyandgeljpg Selected 3 E Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 159 of 707 pages Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Red Eye Correction 5 Click OK Red eyes are corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image P important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image Note Click Compare to display th
400. m gt How Do Print with Even Margins Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 106 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A011 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seket the Rem you wat to create from the manu Seber LORY Co access saved rems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 107 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting a Photo A012 Easy PhotoPrint EX g Selecting a Photo 1 Click Photo Print from Menu The Select Images screen appears Select mages for Shots rug To correct or enhance mages cick the Correct Enhance Button at Agoly correctors and enhancements in the rendtng screen Exif Print a a 2 a Be toe a BE estes Loreres Dm Compete O Sy neok Da3 s Je mosaz a jeg 1430933553 ama Fe SwA secede P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge o
401. mages P important You cannot add frames to images in Stickers and Layout Print i Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box ES Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create F Apoy to all mages in tha paga Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed photos Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Framing Photos Page 228 of 707 pages Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images ona selected page at one time Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application Click Search frames to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing frames Search frames will be displayed only if Album has been selected See Help for details on frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Dates on Photos Page 229 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other
402. mages into Microsoft Office 2007 Word Excel PowerPoint etc use Microsoft Clip Organizer e Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications In that case increase the operating system s virtual memory and retry e When image size is too large such as when scanning large images at high resolution your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 depending on the application In that case cancel the action for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar then increase the operating system s virtual memory or reduce the image size resolution and retry Alternatively scan the image via MP Navigator EX first then save and import it into the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Page 676 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix Appendix s gt Printing Area gt How to Detach Attach the Document Cover s gt Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History s gt Deleting the Undesired Print Job Updating the MP Drivers s gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Transporting the Machine s Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Sharing the Printer on a Network Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Area Page 677 of 707 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area U504 Printing Area To ensure the best
403. me appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List Click Save to save You can load and apply the saved tone curve threshold settings to a preview image To load the settings select the saved item from the pull down menu To delete an item select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete Click Save to save settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List Note Save up to 20 items e Defaults Reset all adjustments saturation color balance brightness contrast histogram and tone curve Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 550 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Auto Scan Mode Tab S813 Auto Scan Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button On the Auto Scan Mode tab documents are automatically detected You do not need to specify cropping frames or make image corrections Ease Mode advence Mode ara sanne Pisce paper and press Scan button Pang Documents Bra Execute recommended mage corrector View aned mages Preferences Guse e Supported Documents Photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD P important The following types of documents cannot be s
404. ment Name list and on the Edit menu choose Document and then Delete Document e To delete a print page click View Thumbnails from the Option menu and select the print page to be deleted Next on the Edit menu select Delete Page from Pages After editing the print documents or print pages you can change the print settings on the Page Information Layout and Manual Color Adjustment tabs as necessary P important To display the multiple documents in the list open the preview and execute print again To return the print documents to their original condition before they were edited in the preview on the Edit menu select Reset Documents from Documents If the documents to be combined have different print settings a message may be displayed Check the contents of the displayed message before combining the documents If the documents to be combined have different output paper sizes and duplex printing or page layout printing is to be performed the printer may not produce the expected print results for certain print pages Check the preview before printing Depending on the print settings of the print document some functions may not be available in the Canon IJ XPS preview Note You can rename Document Name to any name 5 Executing print Click Print When you execute print the printer uses the specified settings to print the data Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from
405. ments are displayed from top to bottom in a comment box A memory of summer 08 20 2010 Family playing with sa nd P important You cannot attach comments to Calendar Stickers and Layout Print Fe Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click ai Edit Image or double click the image Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box E Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Attaching Comments to Photos Page 232 of 707 pages idtm i Postion amp Sze Crop Frame Date Commeres F Show comment box Image Name Show image name Image Name INGO032_s 09 Y Show line Comments Show comments Comments F Show ine F Show capture date coc M Fore sya Deoa taic Center Position 12H rt 5 100 Sze From Left of Page 1595H mm Wih 420 mm From Top of Page 63 2 mm Height 42 0 mm Select the Show comment box checkbox Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display and enter comments Set the size and color of font and position of the comments etc then click OK E Note See Help for details on comments Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adding Text to Photos Page 233 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide
406. mmended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small Note Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied Applying Grain Correction and setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 546 of 707 pages e Gutter Shadow Correction Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image the result will be reflected Preview the effects before scanning as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is pressed Unclear or blurred text lines caused by curved pages are not corrected e None Gutter shadow will not be corrected e Low Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting P important Do not place items that weigh 4 4 lbs 2 0 kg or more on the Platen Also do not press on the document with a force exceeding 4 4 lbs 2 0 kg If you press heavily the scanner may not work correctly or you might break the glass Align the document with the edge of the Platen If not the shadow will not be corrected properly Shadows may not be corrected properly depen
407. multiple cropping frames all the selected cropping frames Active Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are deleted simultaneously Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Resolution Page 564 of 707 pages Nelifiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt Resolution 309 Resolution What is Resolution The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color The density of these dots is called resolution and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains The unit of resolution is dots per inch dpi Dpi is the number of dots per inch 2 54 cm The higher the resolution value the more detail in your image the lower the resolution value the less detail FF Setting the Resolution in MP Navigator EX In MP Navigator EX you can specify the resolution with Scanning Resolution in the Scan Settings dialog box Images for Display on a Monitor Paper photographs to be viewed on a display should be scanned at 150 dpi which is close to ordinary monitor resolution Images for Printing Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution that corresponds to the resolution of the printer For example if you want to print using a 600 dpi black and white printer you should set the resolution to 600 dpi With a color pri
408. mum size 8 50 x 26 61 inches 215 9 x 676 0 mm Paper Weight 17 to 28 Ib 64 to 105 g m except for Canon genuine paper Do not use heavier or lighter paper except for Canon genuine paper as it could jam in the machine Notes on Storing Paper Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package just before printing To avoid curling when you do not print put unused paper back into the package and keep it ona level surface And also store it avoiding heat humidity and direct sunlight Notes on Paper for Full page Borderless Printing Duplex printing is not available for full page borderless printing You cannot use A5 B5 and Legal sized paper and envelopes for full page borderless printing You can use plain paper for full page borderless printing only when printing from a computer However this may result in lower print quality We recommend using plain paper for a trial print O Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 45 of 707 pages Media Types You Can Use Page 46 of 707 pages A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Cannot Use Page 47 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Cannot Use C076 m Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results but also the machine to jam or malfunct
409. n e Check 3 Unplug the machine from the power supply then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 2 minutes If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Advanced Guide Page 605 of 707 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED U305 An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Alarm Lamp Is Lit Orange When a machine error occurs the Alarm lamp is lit orange and the error code as follows is displayed on the LED Check the error code displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action to correct the error Depending on the error occurred the Alarm lamp is not lit Error Code E 0 2 The machine is out of paper Paper does not fal feed v 2 LED display Paper Output Tray is closed Paper jam The FINE Cartridge cannot be recognized LED display E 0 7 FINE Cartridge is not Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reload the paper on the Rear Tray correctly and press the Black or Color button If the Paper Output Tray is closed open it The machine resumes printing If opening the Paper Output Tray does not resolve the problem or if the tray was open to begin with the paper may be jammed Remove the jammed paper reload paper properly in the printer then press the Black or Color butt
410. n Move or Copy the Saved File Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Stickers Page 135 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 136 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A051 SEE Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seket the Rem you wat to create from the manu Seber LORY Co access saved rems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 137 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A052 Ss Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Stickers from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Nev Stickers Canon asv Pheteprini 7 i poloa file Edit View Help Soecty paser sze etc ni General Settings then select a Byout After spectying paper S22 etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Sze Photo Suckers E Prrt date Date S 3 Orentaton A Portrar AJ Lanescape
411. n vividness You can brighten colors that have faded with time etc Move Slider under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation darken the image and to the right to increase the saturation brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 a tow Hgh e gt Saturation decreased Original image Saturation increased ES Note The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much Color Balance Adjust images that have a colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 514 of 707 pages entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors Move Slider under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color Cyan amp Red Magenta amp Green Yellow amp Blue These are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Below is an example of an image in which the Cyan amp Red pair has been adju
412. n Output Settings is Flexible If you select a size other than Flexible a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output Resolution is displayed and its aspect ratio is fixed Note The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size The minimum size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi scaled at 100 When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view the aspect ratio will not be maintained since the size will be prioritized See Adjusting Cropping Frames for details on cropping frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Output Settings Page 540 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Output Settings 805 Output Settings CREET Rose Oust ord Scenes Fedro Correction 1 Gan Corean 1 Backight Correction 1 Gutter Shadow Comrecton Ato ou FF rere Nre Nore nore aa More gt La ema a __ Cetans J i a Preferences eee Output Settings allows you to set the following items e Output Resolution Select the resolution to scan at The higher the resolution value the more detail in your image Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button or enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi in 1 dpi increments Resolution e O
413. n a computer and print them or attach them to e mail You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine w amp Use Images on your Computer My Box 9 Gr Scanned Imported Images Y Specity Folder lt s gt Recently Saved Images E Show this window of statup IT Preterences i e My Box Scanned Imported Images Opens the View amp Use window with My Box Scanned Imported Images selected You can open and use images saved in My Box My Box is a specific folder for saving images scanned with MP Navigator EX E Note By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Specify Folder Opens the View amp Use window with Specify Folder selected You can open and use images saved in specific folders e Recently Saved Images Opens the View amp Use window with Recently Saved Images selected You can open and use Scanned Imported Images and images that have been Attached to E mail or Sent to Application recently View amp Use Window p lieten Mode Switches to One click Mode screen In the One click Mode screen you can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon One click Mode Screen e Show this window at sta
414. n may not be displayed properly e Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties If you change any of the items you will not be able to use the following functions correctly Also if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor the following functions will not operate e Preview before printing on the Main tab e Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box e Page Layout Poster Booklet Duplex Printing Specify Margin Print from Last Page Collate and Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab e Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result e With some applications the printing is divided into multiple print jobs To cancel printing delete all divided print jobs e f image data is not printed correctly display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software This may solve the problem E8 Note a Disable ICM required from the application software cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used Points to Note with Applications e There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word Microsoft Corporation e When Microsoft Word has the same printing
415. n on an image or the portion within the cropping frame When the image is zoomed in Zoom changes to Undo Click Undo to return the display to its non magnified state In thumbnail view When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view clicking this button zooms in on the selected frame Click Ki gt Frame Advance at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame EA Note You can also zoom in on an image by double clicking the frame Double click the frame again to return the display to its non magnified state In whole image view Rescans the portion within the cropping frame at higher magnification ES Note Zoom rescans the image and displays high resolution image in Preview X Enlarge Reduce on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly However the resolution of the displayed image will be low Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab e Preview Performs a trial scan Input Settings Select Source Praten Pacer Sre 1 dl Paten Color Mode Color as 5 i308 so notes zj Output Settings Omt Resolution 1 w Ove Stet Mexbie llu 5 m wos Dota Sae 221m Image Settings Auto ou Descreen oF bd Rede Dust and Soathes 1 Nore x Fede Correction i fone bad Gan Corrector 1 Nore Baddght Correction 1 Nore Gutter Dadon Correction Nore a0 a ioe S on C Preterences Seve
416. n open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu Canon Easy PhetePant EX m ron eae file Edit View Help Select the Ram you want to create fom the many Select LOrecy to access saved tems w EN OY p The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX in icon view only for Windows 7 Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64 bit editions of Windows 7 Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Layout Print screen appears 3 Edit the file if necessary ES Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format extension Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Click Open in the step button area of each screen then select the file you want to edit Double click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 213 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Settings Page 214 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer
417. n perform faster Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi Speed USB the machine will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1 1 In this case the machine operates properly but printing or scanning speed may slow down due to communication speed e Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB port on your computer support Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi Speed USB connection Be sure to use a certified Hi Speed USB cable We recommend that the cable is no longer than around 10 feet 3 meters e Does the operating system of your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Obtain and install the latest update for your computer e Does the Hi Speed USB driver operate properly Obtain the latest version of the Hi Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on your computer P important For details on Hi Speed USB of your system environment contact the manufacturer of your computer USB cable or USB hub Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 614 of 707 pages Nelifiejecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory U310 Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks misaligned lines or uneven colors confirm the paper a
418. n the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the print head alignment sheet 1 Press the Maintenance button repeatedly until the LED displays as follows 2 Press the Black or Color button The print head alignment sheet will be printed i P important Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet Be careful not to get the print head alignment sheet dirty If the sheet is stained or wrinkled Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 582 of 707 pages it may not be scanned properly 5 Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position 1 Load the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass Load the print head alignment sheet WITH THE PRINTED SIDE FACING DOWN and align the mark on the upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark Y 2 Close the Document Cover gently make sure that the LED displays as follows and press the Black or Color button The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet and the print head position will be adjusted automatically When adjusting the print head position is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode Remove the sheet on the Platen Glass P important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded print head alignment sheet until scanning is completed f adjusting the auto print head position has failed the error code will appear on the LED s gt An Error Code Is D
419. n the machine Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray Execute head alignment Make sure that the machine is on and click Align Print Head Follow the instruction in the message Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Position SLEbDOzEEES estes Sesser esisss gt 8 ETTET bits When you have entered all the necessary values click OK ES Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks FENN MHANN A B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks A Less noticeable horizontal white streaks B More noticeable horizontal white streaks 9 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed P important Do not open the Scanning Unit Cover while printing is in progress 10 Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes Clicking the
420. n the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver DR ark Sem E Man SA Page Setup u Efecte Aj Martenance El Page Sze Letier 85x117 a Onentation A Porat A P Rotate 180 degrees BD Prrtes Poper Sze Loter 35x11 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list Setting 2 by 2 page poster printing is complete Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Poster Printing Page 260 of 707 pages 4 Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box and then click OK Poster Printing E22 Image Dyisors Oreded rto 42x 2 i J Pret Cis Paste innog J Port QtPase ines in margins Print page range os Pages Erter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3512 0K coen otas te Image Divisions Select the number of divisions vertical x horizontal As the number of divisions increases the number of sheets used for printing increases allowing you to create a larger poster Print Cut Paste in margins To leave out words Cut and Paste uncheck this check box E9 Note This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used Print Cut Paste lines in margins To leave out cut lines uncheck this check box Print page range Specif
421. n until the part you want to see is displayed You can also move the image using the scroll bars X Enlarge Reduce Click this button then click on the image to enlarge it zoom in Right click on the image to reduce it zoom out _ ina Rotate Left Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again 2 ZA Rotate Right Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again x 4 l Auto Crop Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame MM MM Check All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view OO CIC Uncheck All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view a53 55 Select All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue Select All Cropping Frames This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames All cropping
422. n when printing in black and white m Printing on special paper How to print with optimal quality Tip Check the machine status before printing Is the Print Head OK If print head nozzles are clogged print will be faint and papers will be wasted Print the nozzle check pattern to check the Print Head See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Is the inside of the machine smeared with ink After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink Clean the inside of your machine with the Bottom Plate Cleaning See Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Tip Check how to load the paper correctly e Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation Load paper in the Rear Tray with the printing side facing you e Is the paper curled The curled paper causes paper jam Flatten the curled paper then reload it Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip After loading paper be sure to specify the paper settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 75 of 707 pages After loading paper be sure to select the loaded paper in Media Type of the printer driver or with the Paper button on the Operation Panel If the type of paper is not selected you may not be able to get the satisfactory print result See Copying Printing
423. nd Layout 1 Click Layout Print from Menu The Page Setup screen appears eve Layout Prnt Canca Easy PhotoPrint EX oo ia ex 2 file Edt View Hi Soecty paper sze etc ni General Sartngs then select a Byout After soectynng paper se etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Sze a67 10x150 pret date Date Settings Orentaton A Portrar O Lancscape Layouts E E 003 E 002 003 004 00S 005 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings 3 Select a layout from Layouts E9 Note The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 147 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 148 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting a Photo A153 Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears
424. nd print quality settings first Check 1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper When these settings are incorrect you cannot obtain a proper print result If you are printing a photograph or an illustration incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color Also if you print with an incorrect paper type setting the printed surface may be scratched In borderless printing uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and the loaded paper s To copy by operating the machine Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the machine gt Copying o print from a computer Confirm by using the printer driver m Printing with Easy Setup Check 2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected using the printer driver Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing If you notice blurs or uneven colors increase the print quality setting and try printing again You can confirm the print quality setting using the printer driver s gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Check 3 If the problem is not resolved there may be other causes See also the sections below gt Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Colors Are Unclear Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
425. nd reopen it after printing is complete Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 636 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed Properly U326 Paper Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Make sure of the following when you load paper e When loading two or more sheets of paper flip through the paper before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper align the edges of the sheets before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit However proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature and humidity In such cases reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit e Always load the paper in portrait orientation regardless of the printing orientation e When you load the paper on the Rear Tray load the paper with the print side facing UP and slide the Paper Guides to align with the both sides of the paper gt Loading Paper Originals e Check 2 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled Loading Paper Originals e Check 3 Make sure of the following when you load envelopes When printing on envelopes refer to Loading Paper Originals and prepare the en
426. ner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or scanning documents EA Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function e Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily To change the folder click Browse to specify another one e Sound Settings You can set the machine to play music during at the end of a scan Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox then click Browse and specify a sound file You can specify the following files MIDI file mid rmi midi Audio file wav aif aiff MP3 file mp3 e Calibration Settings When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing and scanning to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images E8 Note Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF the scanner may be calibrated automatically in some cases such as immediately after you turn the machine on Calibration may take time depending on your computer Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Tab Page 554 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preview Tab Page 555 of 707 pages Adna Si Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Preview Tab S809 Preview Tab On the Preview tab y
427. ng U059 Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your machine P important Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning the exterior of the machine so as not to scratch the surface Be sure to use a soft cloth Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine as this may cause a malfunction or damage the machine s surface Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Page 578 of 707 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine U060 Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials as this may scratch the surface Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page 579 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine gt Cle
428. ng on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box gt Scan Tab Related Topic Advanced Mode Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 501 of 707 pages WelFisesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning in Auto Scan Mode 207 Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Use the Auto Scan Mode tab to scan easily by automatically detecting the type of document placed on the Platen P important Supported document types are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and BD DVD CD To scan other documents specify the document type on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab Scanning in Basic Mode s gt Scanning in Advanced Mode 1 Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver gt Placing Documents gt Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 2 Click the Auto Scan Mode tab The Auto Scan Mode tab appears EA Note Select the Execute recommended image correction checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically according to the type of document to be scanned Pisce paper and press Scan button 3 Click Scan Starts scanning EA Note ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog
429. ng Documents for details on how to place documents e Recommended Image Correction Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type P important When this checkbox is selected the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan e Defaults Restore the default settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page 488 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images S011 MP Navigator EX Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX e Using images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 489 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images gt Opening Images Saved on a Computer S507 MP Navigator EX Opening Images Saved on a Computer You can open images saved on a computer and print them
430. ng images This button is displayed only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed e All Categories Displays all categories and images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 433 of 707 pages e Specific Categories Displays categories containing images along with the contained images More images will be displayed in the Thumbnail window allowing you to find or move images easily Note Immediately after opening the View amp Use window categories containing images appear along with the contained images and All Categories is displayed Click All Categories to changes to Specific Categories Edit Custom Categories When My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed the Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens In the Edit Custom Categories dialog box you can add delete categories displayed in Custom Categories See Classifying Images into Categories for details Classify Images Images imported from hard disks appear in Unclassified Click Classify Images to classify them automatically This button is displayed only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed ES Note Classification may take time if there are many images to classify Selected Images Area Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area lhl Cancel Selection Cancels the selection of the target image outlined in orange in th
431. ng the Control Panel Windows XP Only Page 574 of 707 pages Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi gt Resolution Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your document e Reset Click to restore the original settings 6 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right Drag to specify the scan area 7 Click Next and follow the instructions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Maintenance Page 575 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance Maintenance s gt Cleaning Your Machine Aligning the Print Head Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning Your Machine Page 576 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleaning s Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning Page 577 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleani
432. ng the Protrusions inside the Machine to clean them 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Page 71 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine gt Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine C102 m Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Caution Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine If the protrusions inside the machine are stained wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Page 72 of 707 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Machine A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Page 73 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Appendix gt Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to make copies of scan print or use reproductions of the following documents The list provided is non exhaustive When in doubt check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction Paper money Traveler s checks Money orders Food stamps Certificates of deposit Passports
433. nge layout Edit Tools BATH aara i LEA a EE 2 Edit the stickers if necessary gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited stickers It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again gt Saving E8 Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 141 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Printing A055 Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears oe Easy PhotoPrint EX Nev Stickers Canon Eav Pheteprint file Edt View Check sucker omnit settings Cick the Print button to pring wth the current settings Printing starts Preter canon ooo Paper Sge Photo Suckers Meca Type Giossy Photo Paper Ouplex Prnting E Borcaress Prezeg Pret Postion EOP AF E amp oft Copies 1 Pager Source Rear Tray Pring Quality Standard Qualky Settings E v 2 Set the following items according to the printer and pape
434. ning Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1 1 Applications with Restrictions on Use If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 you may not be able to scan using the Operation Panel of the machine In that case restart the computer You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows 7 Windows Vista and Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 Scan with other applications such as MP Navigator EX In some applications if you select the View scanned images checkbox on the Auto Scan Mode tab of ScanGear the window displaying the thumbnails of the scanned images may close automatically Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface In that case refer to the application s manual and change the settings accordingly Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents In some cases only the first scanned image is accepted or multiple images are scanned as one image To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000 first save them using MP Navigator EX then import the saved files from the Insert menu When scanning platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 Word Excel PowerPoint etc click Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Notes Scanner Driver Page 675 of 707 pages Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen Otherwise images may not be scanned correctly e When scanning i
435. nk Is Not Ejected U323 Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected e Check 1 Are the Print Head nozzles clogged Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge e Check 2 Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed securely ink may not be ejected correctly Open the Scanning Unit Cover open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover When you close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place e Check 3 When a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink replace it with a new one Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expe
436. not specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well e Rotate Left 90 Rotate Right 90 Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter clockwise or clockwise Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90 or Rotate Right 90 e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Exif Settings Dialog Box Page 465 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Exif Settings Dialog Box S732 Exif Set
437. ns as required Click Scan Areas framed by broken lines are scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 506 of 707 pages Note ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box Scan Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 507 of 707 pages Nelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver 300 Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver The following sections provide you with tips and know how on advanced scanning techniques involving color brightness adjustment etc e Sharpening out of focus photos reducing dust and scratches and correcting faded colors Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc e Previewing and changing the color tone of the entire image to scan gt Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern e Brightening colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance e Adjusting images that are too dark or bright or too flat due to lack of contrast gt Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting the
438. nt Do not place any object on the Document Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction 2 Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the Platen Glass Align the corner of the original with the alignment mark Important Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the Platen Glass Do not place any objects weighing 4 4 Ib 2 0 kg or more on the Platen Glass Do not put any pressure of 4 4 Ib 2 0 kg or more on the Platen Glass such as pressing down the original Failure to observe the above may cause the scanner to malfunction or the Platen Glass to break The machine cannot scan the shaded area A 0 04 inches 1 mm from the edges of the Platen Glass Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Originals Page 49 of 707 pages A To ensure the best print quality the machine allows a margin along each edge of media The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins B 0 12 inches 3 0 mm C 0 20 inches 5 0 mm D 0 13 inches 3 4 mm 0 25 inches 6 4 mm for Letter and Legal sized paper E 0 13 inches 3 4 mm 0 25 inches 6 3 mm for Letter and Legal sized paper 2 Close the Document Cover gently O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Originals You Can Load Page 50 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper
439. nt size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points at 300 dpi Slanted documents Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation rotated characters Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with narrow line spacing Documents with colors in the background of text Documents containing multiple languages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 397 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files S508 MP Navigator EX Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set passwords for opening editing and printing PDF files You can set two passwords one for opening the file and one for editing printing it This section explains how to set passwords for images scanned into the Scan Import window of MP Navigator EX and how to set passwords for existing files via the View amp Use window P important Ss You will not be able to open edit the file if you forget the password Record your passwords in a safe place for future reference Password protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security In some applications the commands print edit etc restricted by Permissions Password may differ from those in MP Navigator EX Passwor
440. nter specifying the resolution at half the resolution of the printer should be fine For example if you want to print scanned paper photos using a 600 dpi color printer you should set the resolution to 300 dpi However with a high resolution printer printing takes longer than usual if you set the resolution to half the resolution of the printer Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale If you print a document at twice the size both vertically and horizontally the resolution of the document will be reduced by half If the resolution of the original document is 300 dpi the resolution of the enlarged document will be 150 dpi If you print the document with a 600 dpi color printer the lack of detail in the image may be obvious In that case if you scan at the Scanning Resolution of 600 dpi the resolution will be 300 dpi even if you double the size of document and you can print the document with sufficient quality Conversely if you print a document at half scale it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution When Printing Color Photos at Twice the Size Document resolution 300 Print at twice the size Printing resolution 300 dpi Scanning resolution actual scanning dpi Scanning resolution 600 resolution 600 dpi Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Resolution Page 565 of 707 pages dpi Scale 200 Setting the Resolution in ScanGear Scanner Driver In ScanGear you can specify the reso
441. nts gt Specty advanced settings for scanning photes and docererts Document Type Coler Photo X Sening Reschtor 300 dpi Auto Photo Fix Ogscreen F Urcharp Mask Remove gutter shadow Reduce Show through Cl Corect slanted document Detect the onentation of teat documerts and mtata mages a Eh 5 Click Scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 358 of 707 pages Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Cleor Fiace Documents Open the documert cover ard place the phota ot Auer on tye piston Select Document Type Snr alarm are chick Scan Searreg stats 6 Place the left half of the document face down on the Platen 7 Click Scan The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch assist window Click Cancel to cancel the scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 359 of 707 pages Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 360 of 707 pages 2 Scara the tight zide of the document Pisce ond chek Sean 8 Place the right half of the document face down on the Platen 9 Click Scan The right half of the document is scanned EA Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan 10 Adjust the scanned image as required Use the icons to swap the left and right halves rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge reduce the image s f x B BASSR 321314157613 11 19 2027 72
442. nualsPrinter com Manuals Editing 2 3 C3 Inside the back cover 4 C4 Back cover C2 C3 appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank Leave the inside of back cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box s gt Saving ES Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 120 of 707 pages Printing Page 121 of 707 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Printing A025 g Easy PhotoPrint EX SS Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Check aur print sattrigs Cick the Print button to pring weh the aurrent settings Printing starts Preter canon ooo Copies 1 K Paper Sue As Proar Source Rear Tray Meca Toe Photo Paper pis Gosi Parayi Standard Ouplex Prntng Quality Settings T Borderess Preane Advanced A memory of summer 4 fap oac 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automat
443. o Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the Save dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen e Specify Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode When saving as PDF files select PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page
444. o much and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much Contrast Contrast is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image Increasing contrast will increase the difference thus sharpening the image Decreasing contrast will decrease the difference thus softening the image Move Slider under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 cn Low High Decreased contrast Original image Increased contrast EA Note Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three dimensional feel to soft images However shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Histogram Page 517 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Histogram S305 Adjusting Histogram In ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab click Histogram a a 2 a A 2s5 Gray Balance E Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel e Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined e
445. o not turn off the power while the machine is operating Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is scanning originals Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until scanning is completed ES Note The position or size of the original may not be scanned correctly depending on the type of Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Page 22 of 707 pages original In this case refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide to change the settings in Document Type and Document Size of MP Navigator EX to match the original and scan it When the program selection screen appears The program selection screen may appear after performing step 2 If the program selection screen appears select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 and click OK To start MP Navigator EX automatically without displaying the program selection screen follow the procedure below For Windows 7 or Windows Vista users refer to For Windows Users in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide For Windows XP users select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 as the software application to be used in the program selection screen select Always use this program for this action then click OK A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing from Your Computer Page 23 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Printing from Your Computer Printing from Your Computer
446. o or more images and print different types of ID photos on one page See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example ID Photo 3 5x4 5cm 13 5 2 4 6 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 209 of 707 pages E To display the Preferences dialog box click f Settings or select Preferences from the File menu ID photos can only be printed on 4 x6 10x15cm paper Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photo Information Page 210 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Photo Information A079 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side To print them select Letter 8 5 x11 or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout Print screen me eS Select the layout you wart to pret heck the Preview and cick the Print bution Printing starts FRO Sle te aval foal ho livable Note See the follo
447. o the printer Because different models support different print data formats you need a Canon lJ printer driver for the specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of the Canon lJ printer driver e To view all descriptions of a tab Click the Help button on each tab A dialog box opens displaying a description of each item on the tab You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked dialog box e To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to learn about and then click What s This Alternatively when the Help button is found at the right end of the title bar click that button and then click the item you want to learn about A description of the item is displayed Related Topic How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals XPS Printer Driver Page 315 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt XPS Printer Driver P416 XPS Printer Driver The following two printer drivers can be installed on Windows Vista SP1 or later e J printer driver e XPS printer driver The XPS printer driver is suited to print from an application tha
448. o the settings Opening PDF Files in an Application You can open PDF files created with MP Navigator EX in an associated application and edit or print them 1 Select PDF files and click PDF P important For PDF files you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX You cannot select PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Editing PDF Files Page 388 of 707 pages as well 2 Click Open PDF file on the list The application associated with the file extension pdf by the operating system starts P important Password protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed 3 Use the application to edit print the file For details refer to the application s manual P important In some applications the commands print edit etc restricted by Permissions Password may differ from those in MP Navigator EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Page 389 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Printing Documents S502 MP Navigator EX Printing Documents You can print multiple scanned images at one time print at specific qua
449. ocedure for registering a printing profile is as follows Registering a Printing Profile 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the necessary items From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select the printing profile to be used and if necessary change the settings after Additional Features You can also register necessary items on the Main Page Setup and Effects tabs ES Note Effects tab cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used 3 Click Save TA Osek Senp E gt Man SB Page Senp of Eects Ad Martenance Comrenariy Used Setings c E Rodo A EA Prete Parting i H I Suainess Document 3 DF Paper Saving a ON pen Addtional Festues M 2en Prrtrg Bordedoss Prrtng donl Printing Grayscale Prrerg F Duplex Perting E Fast Speed Prony Pert from Last Page Meda Tipe pim daim imkan Pan Pasar Lene 8 S11 2j Onertation Pora Langecape Pere Quality Paper Source aantas coe Petey z Copies 1 1699 E Aways Erre wth Curent Settings sa bemctene j Oofmts ox cca o Hep Coce ho Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 597 of 707 pages 4 Save the settings Enter a name in the Name field and if necessary set the items in Options Then click OK The printing profile is saved and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used S
450. ochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Overview of the Printer Driver Scanning Scanning Printer Driver Operations Canon lJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon lJ Preview Scanning Images Scanning Images Before Scanning Placing Documents Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 81 of 707 pages Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Appendix Various Scan Settings Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Scanning with the Bundled Application Software What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software Let s Try Scanning Starting MP Navigator EX Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Scanning Photos and Documents Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Easy Scanning with One click Useful MP Navigator
451. ocument with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab hanp S Man A Poze Seto a Broce A Martenence El Pope Sze Letier 85x11 gt Onertation A Porat A unce M Rotate 180 degrees BD Prea Paver Sze Loter 35x11 Page Layout Sosed S E H agl Eresszen 1m ee nene e ra g m 0O sae Duplex Parting Lorg cide taping Leh Specty Magn Copes 0 999 1 ie i E Port iom Last Page Collate Pact Options Stamp Backgrund Oetauts Cox cance toe te 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods e Select a Printer Paper Size When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scaled Printing H ak Setup lt Main SA Page Setup of Btects Aj Martenance El Page Sze Letter 8 5x117 Bi amp Onertation A Pora A unce m Seaing 6 20 40 E Oupies Parting Long ade taping Lett v Specty Margin Copes gt 0 333 1 gt ej i E Port tom Last Page Co
452. of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting EA Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG e Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Apply to all images Automatically corrects enhances all images displayed in the thumbnail list e OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images e Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image e Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced image the selected one e Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list e Exit Closes the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab There are two menus on the Manual tab Adjust and Correct Enhance Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window See Correcting Enhancing Images Manually for details Adjustment Chere Uvertarne Pictures MP Naviguter EX 2000_01 011003 jpg Brightness Ad
453. of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Remove stains from the inside of the machine If the inside of the machine becomes dirty printed paper may get dirty so we recommend performing cleaning regularly gt Important Do not perform any other operations while performing the Bottom Plate Cleaning You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Be sure to use a new piece of paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and remove any paper from the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 3 Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in half widthwise and unfold the paper 4 Load only this sheet of paper in the Rear Tray with the open side facing you 5 Clean the inside of the machine 1 Press the j Maintenance button repeatedly until J appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine Check the folded area of the ejected paper If it is smudged with ink perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning again E8 Note When performing the Bottom Plate Cleaning again make sure to use a new piece of paper Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Page 70 of 707 pages If the problem is not resolved after performing the Bottom Plate Cleaning twice the protrusions inside the machine may be stained See Cleani
454. og box 6 Click Scan wr Canon MP Navigator EX Slow Follow the procedure below to ican photos ot documents IT Prefecence p 3 D ho a Asto Scan 1 Piece Documests PhetonDocusests Plaioa Open the dooumert cover and place the photo or Documert Type choumerd onthe platen Color Provo f D 4 2 Select Docesent Type ocumert j Select the a document bom Decumert Aado Detect Mutiple Document Tyce f Rescon Wa Spacy Click Scan Scanning thats June to Man Meru Starts scanning ES Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box opens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next document or select Exit to end The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Photos and Documents Page 352 of 707 pages ox Canon MP Navigon OC Eara ick to select tho image 37 Preference 2 SS a FR A we D yo a M Ce Coe Jumo to Man Meru 7 Edit the scanned images as required Use Edit Tools to rotate images select a part of an image etc See the Edit Tools in Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window for details Note First select images to edit Selected images are outlined in orange Drag the mouse or use Shift arrow keys to select multiple images You can also select images by dragging and dropping them into the Sele
455. ollers then USB Printing Support If USB Printing Support is not displayed make sure that the machine is correctly connected to the computer Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 643 of 707 pages 3 Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device If a device error is displayed refer to Windows help to resolve the error Other Error Messages e Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor check the following e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory Quit other running application softwares to increase available memory If you still cannot print restart your computer and retry printing e Printer driver could not be found Uninstall the printer driver according to the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers and then reinstall it e Could not print Application name File name Try printing again once the current job is complete The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed a confirmation screen asking for permission to send
456. on Paper Jams The FINE Cartridge may not be installed properly or the Cartridge may not be compatible with this machine Open the Scanning Unit Cover and install the appropriate FINE Cartridge After that push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place then close the Scanning Unit Cover If the error is not resolved contact the service center Make sure that each FINE Cartridge An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED installed in the correct position Gl LED display m Ink absorber is almost full grym LED display m Bs w The remaining ink level cannot be detected LED display The FINE Cartridge cannot be recognized LED display m EN a The FINE Cartridge cannot be recognized aS Gal LED display Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 606 of 707 pages is installed in the correct position s gt Routine Maintenance Press the machine s Black or Color button to continue printing Contact the service center The ink may have run out The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled since the ink level cannot be correctly detected If you want to continue printing without this function press the machine s Stop Reset button for at least 5 seconds Canon recommends to use new genuine Canon cartridges in order to obtain optimum qualities Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable fo
457. on Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type P important When this checkbox is selected the files can be saved in JPEG Exif or PDF format only Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 453 of 707 pages The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan Save Settings e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF BMP or PDF P important When Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents You cannot set passwords for PDF files Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards BD DVD CD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for items detected as documents and for items detected as photos When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compressi
458. on Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver S200 Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Starting ScanGear scanner driver gt Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning documents after making simple image corrections s gt Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightness color adjustments s gt Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning with a simple operation s gt Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning multiple documents at one time after making image corrections and color adjustments s gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 495 of 707 pages WelFisesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 202 Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Use ScanGear scanner driver to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application Starting from MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode Screen Follow these steps to start ScanGear from the Navigation Mode screen of MP Navigator EX 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 2 In Scan Import click
459. on for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Therefore you cannot use the Vivid Photo and Photo Noise Reduction functions Solution Menu EX Ver 1 0 0 or later supports the following functions Photo Print Album Calendar Layout Print P important When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started by selecting a function from Solution Menu EX Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen Supported Image Video Data Formats Extensions BMP bmp JPEG jpg jpeg TIFF tif tiff PICT pict pct Easy PhotoPrint image files epp MOV mov P important Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are supported When selecting an image if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder the image may not be displayed correctly or Easy PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format In such cases move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different data format and then select the folder again Note The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as Question Mark When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 102 of 707 pages What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 103 of 707 pages File Formats Extensions Supported by Easy PhotoPrint EX e Easy PhotoPrint EX Pho
460. on of Temporary Files Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily To change the folder click Browse to specify another one P important Anerror may occur if you set the destination to the root directory of the drive on which the operating system is installed Be sure to specify a folder An error may occur if you set the destination to a network folder Be sure to specify a local folder e Application to run Displays the applications that can be started via MP Navigator EX Install the applications from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the machine For Attach to E mail you can select an e mail software program to start For Open PDF file the application associated with the pdf file extension by the operating system is Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Tab Page 483 of 707 pages displayed P important 2 You can change which items are installed during installation from the Setup CD ROM by selecting Custom Install If you choose not to install some applications with Custom Install the corresponding MP Navigator EX functions will be unavailable To use those functions install the corresponding applications Note For Convert to text file Notepad included with Windows is displayed Click Set to open a dialog box then specify Document Language and how to scan multiple documents Document Language Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned Only
461. on type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One click Mode P important Start scanning by clicking the one click button is not displayed when the dialog box is opened directly from Solution Menu EX e Apply Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 454 of 707 pages Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current
462. op Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Page 188 of 707 pages Advanced Guide from Photo Sharing Sites A170 Easy PhotoPrint EX Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites You can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to print P important Internet connection is required to use this function Internet connection fees apply For the purpose of using this function your product name OS information regional information and information that you have clicked ce Import photos from photo sharing sites will be collected and sent to Canon This function may not be available in some regions Itis unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Additionally reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights You may be required permission of way to use the work from copyright holder when using the work of others except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Please check the details carefully of the web page of work in the photo sharing site Please also check terms of service in the photo sharing site before using the work of others Canon is not re
463. or and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255 However in creating black and white images all colors are mapped to either black 0 or white 255 Threshold is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white By adjusting the threshold level you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White In ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab click Fi Threshold ES Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Adjusting Threshold Move Slider to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas Move the slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas You can also enter a value 0 to 255 Threshold Level ght Owk o grr e Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Page 524 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens S800 ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens The following sections describe ScanGear scanner driver s screens and functions and how to use ScanGear s gt Basic Mode Tab m Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons m Auto Scan Mode Tab b Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab Scan Tab
464. or attach them to e mail using MP Navigator EX You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine 1 2 3 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX In the Navigation Mode screen select View amp Use and click My Box Scanned Imported Images Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images Click My Box Scanned Imported Images to open images saved in My Box Scanned Imported Images click Specify Folder to open images saved in a specific folder or click Recently Saved Images to open recently saved images w amp Use Images on your Computer My Box gi Scanned Imported Images Q Specity Folder lt s gt Recently Saved Images e E Show thi window af statu it Proterences 2 E8 Note If the Show this window at startup checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears If the Scan Import window is displayed click View amp Use on the upper left of the screen The View amp Use window opens See View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab for details on the View amp Use Images on your Computer tab Click the folder containing the images you want to open Images saved in the folder appear in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 490 of 707 pages Jump to Man Mera f d CA lrer herhime Pida ND Narigatee DAMLI 0 DN
465. ot displayed when the dialog box is opened directly from Solution Menu EX e Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes e Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans documents with the specified settings When scanning is completed attachment files are created and saved If using an MP Navigator EX compatible e mail software program it starts automatically and a new message screen appears with the image attached Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals OCR Dialog Box Page 474 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt OCR Dialog Box S724 OCR Dialog Box Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One click tab or in the One click Mode screen to open the OCR dialog box o gt Scan documents and conven them to text fies Scan Setiegs Oocunert Tyga Documert gt Color Mode Colo gt Document Size Letter X Resolgen OG E Use the scanner dtyer Ssecty Save Settings Fie rane MG Save as hpe JPEG Et Sa Saven CAUsers UserNtsme Pictures MP Navigate Browse F Sare to a Subfolder wth Curent Date Aopheation Settings OCR wth MP Navigator EX Bea __ ss E Stat scanning by chcking the one cl
466. otoPrint EX Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Start Easy PhotoPrint EX Ec Click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX EA Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing with the Bundled Application Software Create a Personalized Photo Album Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy PhotoPrint EX All you need to do is select which photos to use select a layout then load paper into your printer and print After you bind the printed sheets you ll have the one and only album of your memories You can change the layout and background and attach comments to photos You can arrange a photo across the left and right pages You can also select the size and orientation CHECK eccccccccccccce Select a theme background design to create a single themed album Decorate Items with Text and Frames You can add text and frames to photos Attach a description of the photo in an album and add a frame to enhance the photo s atmosphere Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 704 of 707 pages eH HH H A l U M M U CHECK Select Album to add text and frames You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print Creat
467. ou can specify the following settings Scanner Preview Scan _ Color Settings Preview at Start of ScanGesr Atomatcaly Execute Prese Deplay Saved Preview Image J None Cropping Frare on Previewed Images Execute Auto Cropping on Frevewed Images Desplay the Last Frame on Previewed Images I None Cropping Sine for Thumtead View Larger Standerd Smaller e Preview at Start of ScanGear Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear scanner driver is started e Automatically Execute Preview ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup e Display Saved Preview Image The previously previewed image will be displayed The Color Adjustment Button settings the Toolbar settings and the Advanced Mode tab settings are also saved e None No preview image will be displayed at startup EA Note Select None if you do not want to save the preview image e Cropping Frame on Previewed Images Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images e Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images The cropping frame will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing e Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after previewing e None Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preview Tab Page 556 of 707 pages No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing e Cro
468. ou have trouble with the operation Online Shopping Purchase consumables such as ink from the website Information Find useful information on the machine ES Note The computer must be connected to the Internet to access the website for useful information etc For details on operating Solution Menu EX refer to the online help Select the Help amp Settings menu then click T Solution Menu EX s Help to view the online help Starting Software Applications from Solution Menu EX From Solution Menu EX you can start a software application and also directly access a function of the software application The following procedure is to start Solution Menu EX and for example select one of the Easy PhotoPrint EX functions Photo Print 1 Start Solution Menu EX Double click J Solution Menu EX on the desktop as Click Here Solution Menu EX E8 Note Unless the default setting has been changed Solution Menu EX starts automatically when you start up the computer To start Solution Menu EX from the Start menu select All Programs Canon Utilities Solution Menu EX then Solution Menu EX If Solution Menu EX Main Screen does not appear after starting Solution Menu EX right click 4 Accessory Icon and select Show Main Screen 2 Select the function of a software application that you want to start 1 Click the Photo Print menu 2 Click lt Photo Print Easy PhotoPrint EX will be started and
469. ou should select for Paper Size set Paper Size to Full Platen then measure the size of the document and enter the values into Width and oO Height e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Color Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of R ed G reen and B lue e Grayscale Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Input Settings Page 539 of 707 pages Select this mode to scan black and white photos or to create black and white images This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of black and white e Black and White Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white This mode renders the image in black and white The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels threshold level into black and white and is rendered in two colors The threshold level can be set with Threshold e Input Size In thumbnail view the cropped document size is displayed after preview In whole image view the Paper Size is displayed before preview and the cropping frame scan area size is displayed after preview You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into 5 Width and o Height Click C Change Aspect Ratio and change it to A Keep Aspect Ratio to maintain the aspect ratio when you specify the cropping frame size P important Input size settings are available only when Output Size i
470. out Printing ex Posen Poga Pert a ta Page Order oe tone Page Borger on canoni ootata eo Pages To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper select the number of pages from the list You can also set 2 Page Print or 4 Page Print on the Quick Setup tab Page Order To change the page arrangement order select an icon from the list to change the page placement order Page Border To print a page border around each document page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Poster Printing Page 259 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Poster Printing P401 Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data divide it into several pages and print these pages on separate sheets of paper When the pages are pasted together they form a large print like a poster JL The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows Setting Poster Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set poster printing Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed i
471. over Check 6 If the document is in poor condition dirty faded etc use Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction Grain Correction etc in Image Settings on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear Image Settings Check 7 If the color tone of images is different from the original document take the following measures and scan again e On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None s gt Image Settings e On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear set Color Matching Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Page 652 of 707 pages gt Color Settings Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Page 653 of 707 pages AJAA S Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas S906 Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Check Specify the scan area Click al Auto Crop in whole image view of ScanGear scanner driver to automatically display the cropping frame scan area according to the document size You can also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along the document for example in photos or when you want to create custom cropping frames gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Page top Downloaded from
472. ox opens Check the print result Check the print result When the print result is normal click Exit If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections click Cleaning to clean the print head Related Topic s gt Cleaning the Print Heads Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning Inside the Machine Page 592 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning Inside the Machine P030 Cleaning Inside the Machine Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows Open the printer driver setup window Bottom Plate Cleaning as N Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens o Load paper in the machine As instructed in the dialog box fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally and then unfold the sheet Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down Perform the bottom plate cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and click Execute Bottom plate cleaning starts Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
473. p of Blects AJ Marterance Comenorty Used Seminss Preview before perting Meda Type Porter Paper Sre Envelope less mt Orertator a Porat Landscape Sanders gt Bear Tray Copies 1 gt 146 Aways Erit wth Curert Settings paumons Oefouts When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed select Comm Env 10 DL Env Youkei 4 105x235mm or Youkei 6 98x190mm and then click OK Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally select Landscape for Orientation Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the information is printed on P important the envelope When you execute envelope printing guide messages are displayed To hide the guide messages check the Do not show this message again check box To show the guide again click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab and start the Canon IJ Status Monitor Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu and change the setting to on Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 276 of 707 pages Page top Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 277 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing P009
474. pa Selected 2 9 rst one O Postcard m Q ndri Sze x Eora Blokes Q Custom Categories v Urelestifed Inspr Chasity Images ldt Custom Categories y amp gt ror Print D Send EdivConvent Jumo to Man Mere 4 Caled herNime Pictures WP Mawigatoe DAMLA 0 AVO jeg Images are sorted into the following categories Photos Portrait Others Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Classifying Images into Categories Page 379 of 707 pages Documents Business Card Postcard Standard Size PDF File Others Custom categories Displays your custom categories To create custom categories see Creating Custom Categories Unclassified Displays images that are not classified ES Note Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically Click Cancel to stop Classification may take time if there are many images to classify P important Even if you classify images saved in removable media such as USB flash drive and external hard disk the classification information will be deleted once you remove the media From the next time the images are classified to Unclassified Images cannot be classified when Recently Saved Images is selected in the View amp Use window EA Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories In that case drag and drop the image to the correct category Images saved in network folders may not be cla
475. paper Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged Letter Legal Envelopes Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page 678 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes U502 Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes pF Size Printable Area width xheight AS 5 56 X 7 95 inches 141 2 x2020mm A4 8 00 x 11 38 inches 203 2 x 289 0mMmM Boy 6 90 X 9 80 inches 175 2x249 0mm 4 x6 10x15cm 73 x 5 69 inches 94 8x144 4mm a x8 10x20cm 83 73 x 7 69 inches 94 8x195 2mm B x7 13x18cm 4 73 x 6 69 inches 120 2x169 8mm 8 x10 20x25cm 7 73 x 9 69 inches 196 4x246 0mm Wide 8 73 6 80 inches 94 8x172 6mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm E a 1 23 in 31 2 mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm 1 28 in 32 5 mm a a 0 13 in 3 4mm 0 13 in 3 4mm HB Recommended printing area E Printable area Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Letter Legal Page 679 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Letter Legal U503 Letter Legal Letter 8 00 x 10 69 inches 203 2 x 271 4 mm Legal 8 00 x 13 69 inches 203 2 x 347
476. patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 588 of 707 pages Aligning the Print Head Position 11 12 When you have entered all the necessary values click OK ES Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks FENNI IUUUUUIIT A B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed P important Do not open the Scanning Unit Cover while printing is in progress Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the associated boxes Clicking the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the preview window will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 589 of 707 pages Aligning the Print Head Position Page 590 of 707 pages TTT L J sh e ee se M a E es M a UM oe ee eae UM a ss a a M 0 E s ee y ee a X LJ KA nQ Bm o O o M u b M l M ok M es M a e ea o i D a U e M a lM 2 a o oe o M When you have entered all the necessary values click OK ES Note f itis difficult to pick the best pattern
477. pecified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 425 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save as PDF file Dialog Box S717 Save as PDF file Dialog Box In the Save as PDF file dialog box you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF files You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP Navigator EX P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions When Opened from the Scan Import Window 7 Save the image to the spected folder as a PDE fle Save as ype POF DAstple Pages z Stoo F Password securty setings You can save multiple images to one PDF fle Swen CAUsers UserNarre Picis NP Navigator EX 2910_0 Browse j EZ Save to a Sublolder wth Gurert Date C a When Opened from the View amp Use Window RY Save the image to the spectied folder as a PDE file ae Navigator EX 2010_01_01 Bowe Hense 001 NEW Seveasnpe Pormage Pages St l Enssweed socurty settings E Save to a Sutfolder wth Gurert Date Ce __Caneet__ e Save as type Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 426 of 707 pages
478. ped properly and this will cause drying or clogging To disconnect the power plug be sure to follow this procedure e Print periodically Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time even if it is capped the Print Head too may become dried or clogged if the machine has not been used for a long time We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month ES Note Depending on the type of paper ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint stick or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area mw Colors are uneven and print results are blurred Tip Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are clogged If the print head nozzles are clogged colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 77 of 707 pages In this case a Print the nozzle check pattern Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 78 of 707 pages MP280 series Advanced Guide x ie P i i 8 s MC 4740 V1 00 a a s Basic Guide Printing Copying Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX roubleshooting Printing
479. pens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next document or select Exit to end The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window a Sere i iT Fton 2 S FR At Be One a Photer Decements Pinten To continue scanning load the nent document and Ak Scan Cee Co Selections E Jumo to Man Meru 6 Edit the scanned images as required Use Edit Tools to rotate images select a part of an image etc See the Edit Tools in Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window for details EA Note First select images to edit Selected images are outlined in orange Drag the mouse or use Shift arrow keys to select multiple images You can also select images by dragging and dropping them into the Selected Images area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 348 of 707 pages Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Page 349 of 707 pages 7 Save the scanned images s gt Saving Saving as PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Photos and Documents Page 350 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Scanning Photos and Documents S102 MP Navigator EX Scanning Photos and Documents Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode sc
480. ping Frame stationary thin broken lines The settings will not be applied E Note Active Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are displayed in whole image view Initial Cropping Frame In thumbnail view Cropping frame is not displayed initially Drag the mouse over a frame to create a cropping frame In whole image view A cropping frame Active Cropping Frame is displayed automatically around the preview image according to the document size You can also create a cropping frame by dragging the mouse in the Preview area ES Note Cropping frames are set according to the document size Auto Crop by default For details see Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab Preferences dialog box Adjusting a Cropping Frame The cursor will change into Ss ra Arrow when it is positioned over a cropping frame If you click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow the cropping frame will expand or contract accordingly Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 562 of 707 pages The cursor will change into Crosshair arrow when it is positioned within a cropping frame Click and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame ES Note In Advanced Mode tab you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into a Width and Height in Input Settings Input Settings You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking
481. plug the power cord The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Sharing the Printer on a Network Page 697 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network P042 Sharing the Printer on a Network When multiple computers are being used in the network environment you can share the printer connected to one computer with the other computers The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same LA L L Cent PC Client PC Client PC e Settings on Print Server The procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as follows e Settings on Client PC The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as follows When you execute print the data is sent to the printer through the print server system P important Incase an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer the error message of Canon lJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print server system For regular printing Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client system E8 Note Install the printer driver from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the machine on the print server system and each of the client
482. pping Size for Thumbnail View Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents e Larger Displays 105 in width and height of the area displayed for the standard size e Standard The standard size e Smaller Displays 95 in width and height of the area displayed for the standard size Note When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size As the preview images are refreshed the color adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Tab Page 557 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Scan Tab S810 Scan Tab On the Scan tab you can specify the following settings Scanner Preview S89 Color Settings Status of ScanGear dalog after scanning D Close ScanGear automatically Do nes cose ScanGear atocnatcaly D Display the dalog to select next action e Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning Select what to do with ScanGear scanner driver after scanning images e Close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed e Do not close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the ScanGear screen for another scan when scanning is completed e Display the dialog to se
483. print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with ICC Profiles FR Crack Sep Mor B Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance E Paper Source Fear Troy Prt Qualty HA Sagded BD on Custom Pian Paper Color rtensty Leter 8 5 x11 215 279 den Apo Preview before parting panoa Odas Cok cnca __ too __ Hee 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select ICM or ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction 6 Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data e For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile Select Standard e For Adobe RGB data Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 292 of 707 pages Printing with ICC Profiles Page 293 of 707 pages Select Adobe RGB 1998 P important When the application software specifies an input profile the input profile setting of the
484. properly 5 Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position 1 Load the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass Load the print head alignment sheet WITH THE PRINTED SIDE FACING DOWN and align the mark PW onthe upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark y 2 Close the Document Cover gently make sure that U uppercase U appears on the LED then press the Black or Color button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 60 of 707 pages The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet and the print head position will be adjusted automatically When adjusting the print head position is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode Remove the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded print head alignment sheet until adjusting the print head position is completed f adjusting the print head position has failed the error code will appear on the LED Press the Stop Reset button to release the error then refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Note If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above adjust the print head position manually from the computer For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To print and check the current head position a
485. quired It is convenient to save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly You can also use this to reload the default settings Select Add Delete from the pull down menu and the Add Delete Favorite Settings dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Page 533 of 707 pages Add Delete Favorite Settings Setting Name Fororie Settings Ust New Setting Enter Setting Name and click Add The name appears in Favorite Settings List When you click Save the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected along with the predefined items To delete an item select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete Click Save to save settings displayed in Favorite Settings List ES Note You can set Add Delete in Favorite Settings after preview Save up to 10 items e Input Settings Specify the input settings such as the document type and size s gt Input Settings e Output Settings Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size Output Settings e Image Settings Enable disable various image correction functions b Image Settings e Color Adjustment Buttons These buttons can be used to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones You can adjust the image s overall brightness or contrast and adjust its highlight and shadow values histogram or balance tone curve Color Adjustment Buttons e Zoom Zooms i
486. r EX Screens gt View amp Use Window S711 View amp Use Window Select View amp Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box Scanned Imported Images Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View amp Use window Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer Cick ts celect the image THT Poefecences Na meam me Oe e Cose At Al Coge Edt Cuntorn Categenes v Phono beepers Selected 6 v Pota Imepeat ekotetd apa 3 Eom Eo Elwe v Oes haya eketet 2 EE Eose v Urcheottied insya 1 Display Setting Items 2 Image Handling Buttons 3 Toolbar 4 Thumbnail Window 5 Selected Images Area P important a For PDF files only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed You cannot display PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be displayed as well Display Setting Items Scan Import Click this when you want to scan photos documents magazines and other printed materials The Scan Import window opens Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 430 of 707 pages My Box Scanned Imported Images Displays folders of images grouped by year year month and year month date in My Box in tree view Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right Image date is the scann
487. r Settings gt Replacing Photos A084 Easy PhotoPrint EX KE Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image cc yo Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen then click Replace Selected Image EA Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create New images imooted mazes gt Bl o hy Lerares BR Computer O Sip netweeke t i 0 t DGO00O_4J99 IHGO001_ 5429 14G0103_s 00 Edit Tool Beve Vi i D MGNON sion MCE sisa MGNNTS Sian Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click OK If you want to select from the images already imported click the Imported Images tab and select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK P important You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box E Note If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function all the images selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog box When images are replaced the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image Position Size
488. r any malfunction or trouble caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition The FINE Cartridge may not be compatible with this printer Install the appropriate FINE Cartridge Routine Maintenance The FINE Cartridge may not be installed properly Open the Scanning Unit Cover and install the FINE Cartridge properly Routine Maintenance An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED E 1 6 The ink has run out bd Ww LED display m g o The size of the original cannot be correctly detected or the document is too small when the Fit to Page copying is selected Fagu Gal LED display m o A The machine is not connected with the computer pum LED display m a 7 Scanning the print head alignment sheet has failed E A LED display Page 607 of 707 pages The ink has run out Replace the ink cartridge and close the Scanning Unit Cover If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing press the machine s Stop Reset button for at least 5 seconds with the ink cartridge installed Then printing can continue under the ink out condition The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled Replace the empty ink cartridge immediately after the printing The resulting print quality is not satisfactory if printing is continued under the ink out condition e Make sure that the original meets the requirements and is correctly loade
489. r com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 372 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Adjusting Images S406 Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust EA Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Edit Convert then click Fix photo images on the list 9 Chck to select the imaga ET Preference Z H HF ee zon a G a j corres Core Al Al Cotegooes Edt Custom Categones Hp Dos ScomnedAapeiod Images Sporty Folder v Po may6 Seats Recently Saved imago v Pora Image elected O My Bex 5 D QD Ote s a Q Prete Q Portrait Q Other y gt ror Print D Send P Edil Canvest Corprest to tent Me Juno to Man Mera CiUert rerhleme Dicbares M Mavigatee DAMO 00 MOL jeg The Correct Enhance Images window opens ES Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box In that case only the target image outlined in orange
490. r edit the file select Create Edit PDF file on the list To print the file click Print Document In the Password dialog box you will be prompted to enter a password 2 Password IMG CO02_ NEW pct is protected Please erter a permissions password A Cick Cancel to cancel the process Erter Password ES Note Ifthe Document Open Password is set as well the Document Open Password will be required then the Permissions Password will be required 3 Enter the password and click OK The corresponding dialog box opens P important f apassword protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords Setting Passwords for PDF Files Related Topic Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP Navigator EX Screens Page 404 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens S700 MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Screens Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX Scan Import Documents or Images Tab s gt Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window e Scan Settings Dialog Box Auto Scan s gt Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window e Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents e Save Dialog Box e Save as PDF file Dialog Box View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab View amp Use Window Create Edi
491. r status monitor 1 Open the printer driver setup window Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 2 On the Maintenance sheet click View Printer Status 3 Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected e If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista Launching MP Navigator EX Whenever Pressing the SCAN Button on the Machine e Check Specify the response from pressing the SCAN button on the machine Follow the procedure below to specify the response on your computer e If you are using Windows 7 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Select Devices and Printers from the Start menu 3 Right click the Canon XXX Printer icon where XXX is your machine s name then select Scan properties If the User Account Control screen appears click Yes 4 Click the Events tab on the WIA Canon XXX ser Properties where XXX is your machine s name screen 5 Select Start this program for Actions then select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 from the pull down menu Choose an event from the Select an event pull down menu then select MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 to launch for each event If MP Navigator EX Ver4 0 is already selected for each event click Cancel 6 Click OK e If you are using Windows Vista 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals For Windows Users Page 646 of 707 pages 2 Select the Start menu gt Control Pan
492. r to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Print Position dialog box click Print Position You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box To display the Adjust You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print ES Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 142 of 707 pages See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Layout Page 143 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout A150 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts onitholbeac Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This
493. rber it may be ejected on the paper if you load paper larger than that you have specified Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 628 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked U320 Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven POOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOODOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOHR Colors Are Streaked e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace th
494. rder Example Borderless x4 3 2 4 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Index Page 206 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing an Index A077 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page It is convenient for managing your photos To print an index select Index from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you want to pret Check the Preview and cick the Print bution Printing starts FRO P important Index cannot be printed if you select any of the following paper sizes Credit Card You can print up to 80 images on one page E Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example Index x20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print
495. re Settings area is displayed LOTTA Time Range Slider Displays the time range set with Caja Set start time Set end time You can also set the start end time by moving EJB Start End point located below the slider ES Note This slider is displayed only when the Auto Frame Capture Settings area is displayed 3 Captured Frame s Area Displays the thumbnails of the captured still images Double click a thumbnail image to display the Zoom In window in which you can check the details of the image Select all frames Selects all the images displayed in the Captured frame s area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window When you select an image a checkmark appears in its checkbox Ld Clear all check marks Cancels all image selections in the Captured frame s area Correct image Displays the Correct Captured Frames window in which you can correct all the images selected in the Captured frame s area ES Note When a frame in which the subject or camera has moved significantly is captured the image may not be corrected properly Corract Captured Frames E Apply to all frames Rese cted Frames a ae 0 00 00 76 0 00 03 06 0 00 05 83 a 1 Task Area Noise Reduction Reduces noise tonal variation that may appear in images taken in dark locations such as night scenes using a digital camera Enhance resolutions Select this checkbox to reduce the jaggi
496. re below to reinstall the MP Drivers 1 Click Cancel 2 Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen 3 Click Back on the screen that appears next 4 Click Exit on the PIXMA XXX screen where XXX is your machine s name then remove the CD ROM 5 Turn the machine off 6 Restart the computer 7 Make sure that you have no application software running 8 Insert the CD ROM again then perform Easy Install to install the MP Drivers In other cases Follow the procedure described in your setup manual to reinstall the MP Drivers If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly uninstall the MP Drivers restart your computer and then reinstall the MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers If you reinstall the MP Drivers perform Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then select MP Drivers ES Note If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers Restart your computer before reinstalling Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Install the Application Program Page 612 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the Application Program U347 Cannot Install the Application Program Easy WebPrint EX Does Not Start up or Easy WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear If Easy WebPrint EX does not start up or its menu does not appear on Int
497. re printing When this check box is checked the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed before printing starts This dialog box allows you to check how many pages will be printed On the Document Selection tab select the method for printing the document The following four methods of printing are available e Print Current Document e Print Selected Documents e Print My Manual Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing This Manual e Print All Documents Note You can select the type to be printed and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab Print Current Document You can print the currently displayed document From Select Target select Current Document The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Note By selecting Print linked documents you can also print documents that are linked to the current document The linked documents are added to the Documents to Be Printed list Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes The documents that are currently displayed are printed
498. rect Enhance Images window appears 22 Correct Enhance Images e RedEye Coneetion 29 Face Shspenet os Doptal Face Smoothing En CA Users UserName friends jpg Selected 3 ES Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Auto Enhancement 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 168 of 707 pages 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing 5 Click OK Skin is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation f you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all imag
499. reen Starting MP Navigator EX 3 In Scan Import click Photos Documents Platen e E Show tis window of statu 17 Proterences c 4 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned a om fa baer es eo oe A SRA 4 i Ce Piece Documests Open the document cover and place the photo or Omeri onthe platen Qe Select Docesent Type Saateni of photoydocument bom Document Click Scan Scanning tatz due to Man Meru Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Photos and Documents ES Note When you select Magazine Color the descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes longer than usual To disable the descreen function deselect the Descreen checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box Select Text OCR to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP Navigator EX Page 351 of 707 pages Color scanning is not available for Text OCR To scan in color open the OCR dialog box from the One click Mode screen and scan with Color Mode set to Color 5 Click Specify to set the document size and scanning resolution as required When setting is completed click OK Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents P important When scanning a large document such as an A4 size photo align its corner with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen and specify the document size in the Scan Settings dial
500. rent layout can be fitted ES Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Layout Page 217 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Background Page 218 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Background A081 Easy PhotoPrint EX S87 Changing Background You can change the background of each page P important You cannot change the background of the Stickers and Layout Print Click Background in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen then click kaj Change Background Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Select from samples Single color Image fle No background Edit Took ganm amaa sane aE Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box When Select from samples Is Selected Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK ES Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Back
501. res E Coros D Nedeork DHGODOD_s jog INGO001_sJ99 5460109_sio9 Y Front Cover 0 1 Inside Pages 0 erape s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser EX the folder tree area will not be displayed The images selected in the application will be displayed as thumbnails EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click one of the buttons below To print on the front cover click Import to Front Cover To print on the inside pages click Ke Import to Inside Pages To print on the back cover click Import to Back Cover Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 118 of 707 pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click E _ Delete Imported Image To delete all images from t
502. ress the halftones Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image data is printed with the selected print quality level and halftoning method P important Certain quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type Note If part of an object is not printed selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem Related Topics s gt Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 283 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome P012 Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab h aksep D Man 53 Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance Moda Type Pian Poper z i Paper Source Fea Tray Print Gualty HA Sanded a om Cu
503. rinting Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 52 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect C093 When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly the print head nozzles FINE Cartridges are probably clogged Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern check the print head nozzle condition then clean the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory aligning the Print Head may improve print quality gt Important Do not rinse or wipe the FINE Cartridges This can cause trouble with the FINE Cartridges ES Note Before performing maintenance Check if ink remains in the FINE Cartridge See Checking the Ink Status Check if the FINE Cartridges are installed correctly See Replacing Procedure Check if the orange protective tape on the bottom of the FINE Cartridge is removed See Replacing Procedure if the Alarm lamp lights or flashes orange refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven Step 1 See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern I
504. rt settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX Printer appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s e If the setting is incorrect Reinstall the MP Drivers e Printing does not start even though the port named USBnnn is selected Launch Canon My Printer from the task tray select Diagnose and Repair Printer Follow the on screen instructions to set the correct printer port then select Canon XXX Printer If the problem is not resolved reinstall the MP Drivers e Check 6 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Page 632 of 707 pages Nelieielecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed U322 Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Check 1 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head may overheat To protect the Print Head the machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing In this case interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes Additionally if the machine has been print
505. rtup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View _Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 409 of 707 pages e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box fia Guide Opens this guide Related Topic Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Scan with One click Tab Page 410 of 707 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Custom Scan with One click Tab S704 MP Navigator EX Custom Scan with One click Tab Select One click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One click tab You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon Viow amp Use gt g aa D gt WW 3 Asto Scoa Sove to PC Save os POF So Ma lt o aa lt gt Q Altech to E mail ocr Custoes O Stat scanning by clicking the button o gt Show fit window af statin e Auto Scan Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type File format is automatically set Files are saved to a computer When you click this icon the Auto Scan dialog box
506. ry to display the image The file is corrupted When Images are Sorted by Categories Scanned images are displayed by category ES Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories In that case drag and drop an image and move it from one category to another e Category name Images N Selected n w Photo Images 3 Selected 1 w Portrait Images 2 Selected 1 e Category name The following categories are provided Photos Portrait Others Documents Business Card Postcard Standard Size PDF File Others Custom categories Displays your custom categories Unclassified Displays images that are not classified e Images N The number of images classified into the category is displayed e Selected n The number of images with the checkbox selected is displayed Note This portion is displayed only when one or more images are selected e Close All Open All You can hide or show all images in the displayed categories This button is displayed only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed e Close All Hides all images e Open All Displays all images ES Note Immediately after opening the View amp Use window or sorting images all images appear and Close All is displayed When you click Close All the button changes to Open All e All Categories Specific Categories You can display all categories or only those containi
507. s A4 or 8 5 x 11 Plain Paper A4 or 8 5 x 11 Photo Paper 10x 15cm or 4 x 6 Photo Paper You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel See Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Photos When the Fit to Page copy function is enabled you can copy the original in the size automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size In this case the original is copied with borders on the plain paper and without borders on the photo paper Cancel the Fit to Page copy function to copy the original in the same size See Fit to Page Copying 3 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts copying Remove the photo on the Platen Glass after copying is completed gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded photo until copying is completed Note To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 17 of 707 pages Fit to Page Copying Basic Guide E E Contents gt Copying gt Fit to Page Copying C024 Fit to Page Copying The Fit to Page copy function enables you to copy the original automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size B 1 Prepare for
508. s Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Aligning the Print Head C098 m Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position E8 Note If the remaining ink level is low the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low See Replacing a FINE Cartridge You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper including recycled paper Be sure to use paper that is white and clean on both sides 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the print head alignment sheet 1 Press the j Maintenance button repeatedly until u lowercase u appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The print head alignment sheet will be printed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 59 of 707 pages iisiiie nanes temene nrn sanati rrer atesi mapen athe COUT IVAUNUAAL IUAUNUAAM HAUNT ul E E d gt Important Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet Be careful not to get the print head alignment sheet dirty If the sheet is stained or wrinkled it may not be scanned
509. s JPEG Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 479 of 707 pages Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application In that case select an option other than Auto in Save as type You cannot set passwords for PDF files If you select JPEG Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for items detected as documents and for items detected as photos When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2010_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox i
510. s PDF Files s gt Saving as PDF Files See the corresponding sections below for details on using images files Creating editing PDF files from scanned images s gt Creating Editing PDF Files Printing multiple scanned images at one time or printing at specific size quality etc gt Printing Documents Printing scanned photos Printing Photos Sending scanned images via e mail gt Sending via E mail Correcting enhancing scanned images or converting them to text Editing Files Setting passwords for created PDF files s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Page 382 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Saving S112 MP Navigator EX Saving Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer 1 Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save then click Save N n eea 1t Preen P ACELEI ES Bs yoe a lt j ate __ Phetos Documents Praten a E Color Prono Seloctions E Save a PDF fle Jumo to Man Meru 2 In the Save dialog box specify the save settings Specify the destination folder file name and file type gt Save Dialog Box Save in C Users Userltame Pictures MP Navigator EX 2010_01_01 Browse
511. s available only when keyword search is set For details of creating PDF files that enables keyword search see PDF Settings Dialog Box Password protected PDF files cannot be searched Category You can search for images by category Modified Date To search for images that have been updated in a specific time period enter the first and last dates of the period Shooting Date To search for images captured in a specific time period enter the first and last dates of the period ES Note Shooting date is the date and time of data creation which are included in the image s Exif information More Advanced Options e Aword or phrase in the file In A word or phrase in the file select the items to search If you select the Exif information Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 376 of 707 pages Searching Images Page 377 of 707 pages checkbox text in Maker Model Description and User Comment is searched If you select the PDF text checkbox text in PDF files is searched P important Text in password protected PDF files cannot be searched e Search subfolders Select this checkbox to search subfolders e Case sensitive Select this checkbox to match case e Match all criteria Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria e Match any criteria Searches for files that meet any of the specified criteria e Start Search Starts search Related Topic View amp Use Window Page top Downlo
512. s checkbox is selected The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan e Defaults Restore the default settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 417 of 707 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window S708 MP Navigator EX Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Select Scan Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos Documents Platen or click Photos Documents Platen in the Scan Import window to open the Photos Documents Platen screen Scan Import window Open this window when you want to scan documents from the Platen Selections E 2 l tod Seve at PDF fe dumo to Man Meru 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2 Toolbar 3 Thumbnail Window 4 Selected Images Area Settings and Operation Buttons View amp Use Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer The View amp Use window opens s gt View amp Use Window e Auto Scan Click this when you want to scan documents by automatically detecting the document type etc The screen for scanning with Auto Scan appears s gt Auto Scan Screen Scan Import Window Photos Do
513. s combined When the number of pages increases due to added images you cannot add images beyond page 400 E Note Inthe Add Image dialog box you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adding Photos Page 222 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Swapping Positions of Photos Page 223 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Swapping Positions of Photos A083 Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images Click EA Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Swap Image Positions in the Edit screen Saad costes of Two mages n The adum Select target and soutce Mages GB saap Posters WEO NE oy Edit Tools aleae Be Select the target and source images you want to swap then click Swap When you finish swapping all images you want to swap click Back to Edit Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Replacing Photos Page 224 of 707 pages WelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Othe
514. s for color management The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab Rasp D Han E Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance 3 Paper Source Rear Teny Prt Qualty HA Sagded Bon Quston panoa Otas Cox Cancel toe Ho 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select Driver Matching for Color Correction Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 289 of 707 pages T Manual Coler Adjustment lee Calor Correction KM None 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjustin
515. s not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB P important This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG Exif and Document Type is not Auto Mode This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed E8 Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected When you save an image with the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name Example _Image0001 jpg e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder file name and Exif information gt Save Dialog Box Application Settings e Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type The specified application starts after images are scanned P important Depending on the specified application the images may not appear correctly or the application may not start Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 480 of 707 pages EE Note For further procedures refer to the application s manual e Reset Cancels th
516. s of the machine and describes the basic operations you need to know before using it Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Operation Panel LED Display and Basic Operations A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Main Components Page 4 of 707 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Overview of the Machine gt Main Components co01 Main Components Front View m Rear View m Inside View mp Operation Panel m Front View 1 6 5 1 Document Cover Open to load an original on the Platen Glass 2 Paper Support Raise and tip back to load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Rear Tray Load various sizes or types of paper which you can use on the machine Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper 4 Paper Guides Slide to align with both sides of the paper stack 5 Paper Output Tray Opens automatically when printing or copying starts and printed paper is ejected 6 Output Tray Extension Open to support the printouts Open it when printing or copying Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Main Components 7 7 Platen Glass Load an original to copy or scan 8 Operation Panel Use to change the settings of the machine or to operate it See Operation Panel E8 Note The LED and lamps on the Operation Panel other than the POWER lamp
517. s the corrected enhanced image the selected one e Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list e Exit Closes the Correct Enhance Images window Toolbar e Toolbar Rotate Left Rotates the image 90 degrees counter clockwise Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 448 of 707 pages B Rotate Right Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise Ad Invert Inverts the image horizontally a Trimming Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest In the displayed window drag the white frame to specify the trimming area Move the cursor inside the white frame and drag to move the trimming area E8 Note Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a balanced image A Enlarge Enlarges the displayed image g Reduce Reduces the displayed image aa Full screen Displays the entire image in Preview Compare Opens a window in which you can compare the images before and after the correction enhancement side by side The source image appears on the left and the corrected image appears on the right Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 449 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals One click Mode Screen Page
518. s used The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human skin color natural By using this function you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Vivid Photo Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab l rage Optmiser 1 Photo Optimizer PRO Apply Throughout Page a Photo Noise Reductor Norma Pan Paper Leter 85x11 215 9 279 4em 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with vivid colors Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 306 of 707 pages Anad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines P407 Smoothing Jagged Outlines This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used The Image Optimizer function reduces the jagged outlines that are produced when photos and graphics are enlarged with your application It allows you to print smooth outlines This feature is
519. s when using CC licensed images except for personal use or use within the home Unauthorized copying of images is illegal except for personal home use or for use within such limited scope Copying portraits photographs of persons may infringe personality rights You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes You may not modify the work You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not modify the work You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes
520. s window appears oe gt RedEye Conecton 22 Face Shspener 9S Digtal Face Smoothing Ex CA Users UserName IMG sipg c Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be adjusted See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Click Manual then click Adjust 4 Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level The following adjustments are available Brightness Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 173 of 707 pages Contrast Sharpness Blur Show through Removal E8 Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the adjustment side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone See Advanced in the descriptions of the Correct Enhance Images window for details Click Defaults to reset all adjustments 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new f
521. screen is the function for reducing this moire effect P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo Black and White Photo or Text OCR Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen e Unsharp Mask Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Text OCR e Remove gutter shadow Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets P important You cannot select this checkbox when Auto Detect Auto Detect Multiple Documents or Stitch Assist is selected for Document Size When scanning align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen Note Use ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set See Gutter Shadow Correction for details e Reduce Show through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo Black and White Photo or Text OCR Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page 423 of 707 pages Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show through is apparent in the scanned ima
522. screen manual Advanced Guide If you select the wrong media type the machine may not print with the proper print quality 3 Click OK r om Pres Neena M Oen we Lt Papiae f n j ene Prrare ton oreng EA Note For details on the printer driver functions click Help or Instructions to view the online help or the on screen manual Advanced Guide The Instructions button appears on the Quick Setup Main and Maintenance sheets if the on screen manual is installed on your computer You can name the changed settings and add to Commonly Used Settings For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the Always Print with Current Settings check box is selected the current settings will be applied from the next print job onward Some software applications may not have this function To display the preview to confirm the print result select the Preview before printing check box Some software applications may not have a preview function You can specify the detailed print settings on the Main sheet or Page Setup sheet For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide T Start printing Click Print or OK to start printing Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents ea Member 7 cope ES Note The message on how to load envelopes will appear when printing on them This message will not appear next time if you select the Do not show this me
523. se the same password for both 3 Click OK The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens Document Open Password i Confirm Document Open Password Please confiem the document open password Be sure to make a note of the A password t wil be required to open the document Document Open Password C cane Permissions Password Confirm Pemissons Password Please confem the peerissors password Be sure to make a nate of the Ay pasoword wi be required to print or edit the document in the future Neto See oS comonomer DE Sere near he emuanene You have set in permissions password Peenissons Password Con cance 4 Re enter the password and click OK The Save as PDF file dialog box returns P important If you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save the settings in the Password Security Settings dialog box will be deleted Passwords are deleted once the file is edited Reset the passwords when saving edited files EA Note If you set the passwords via the PDF Settings dialog box the PDF Settings dialog box returns Click OK The Save as PDF file dialog box returns 5 Click Save Files are saved according to the settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 400 of 707 pages Related Topic Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page top Downloaded from
524. seful Copy Functions Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Machine Cannot Be Powered On An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Alarm Lamp Is Lit Orange POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately LED Cannot Be Seen At All Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot Install the Application Program Easy WebPrint EX Does Not Start up or Easy WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed Print Results Not Satisfactory Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Colors Are Unclear Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP280 series Advanced Guide Page 84 of 707 pages Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Printing Does Not Start Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Jams Paper Is Jammed in the Pap
525. sic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper gt Loading Envelopes C074 m Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US 10 envelopes The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope s direction by specifying with the printer driver properly gt Important You can only print on envelopes with the computer Do not use the following envelopes They could jam in the machine or cause the machine to malfunction Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive E8 Note The message on how to load envelopes will appear when printing on them This message will not appear next time if you select the Do not show this message again check box 1 Prepare envelopes e Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them e f the envelopes are curled hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction Fy i e f the corner of the envelope flap is folded flatten it e Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease gate lt K x x x O T C eee ee The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope gt Important The envelopes may jam in the machine if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned Make sure that no curl or puff
526. siders as ink is full when a new FINE Cartridge is installed and then starts to detect a remaining ink level If you install a used FINE Cartridge the indicated ink level of it may not be correct In such case refer to the ink level information only as a guide When remaining ink cautions or errors occur the error code will appear on the LED to inform you of the error Refer to An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide and take an appropriate action With the Ink Lamps on the Operation Panel Make sure that the LED is in the copy standby mode You can confirm the ink status with the Ink lamps 1 2 3 1 Alarm lamp 2 Color Ink lamp 3 Black Ink lamp Color Ink lamp or Black Ink lamp lights The ink is running low Prepare a new ink cartridge Color Ink lamp or Black Ink lamp flashes while Alarm lamp lights An error has occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide For some types of errors the Alarm lamp may not light With the Computer Screen You can confirm the ink status with the printer status monitor g Conan 7200 soviet Pree UROL W Opies be Ouats help Sy SS ann note Fore Gene A symbol appears in the area A if there is any information about the remaining ink level Example The ink is running low Prepare a new ink cartridge E gt Note An error message may appear
527. sity P019 Adjusting Intensity You can dilute brighten or intensify darken the colors of the overall image data during printing The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed No adjustment Higher intensity The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity on the Main tab and click Set Canon MP280 series Printer Printing Preferences UR Caick Setup Man 13 Page Setup of Efecte Aj Martenance Meda Tipe Pian Paper E Paper Source Roae Tory Pret Qualty The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies darkens the colors Moving the slider to the left dilutes brightens the colors You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver After adjusting each color click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Intensity Page 299 of 707 pages 0 a 8 amp low
528. sponsible for the any copyright problems by using this function This function is supported under Windows XP or later This product uses the Flickr API but is not endorsed or certified by Flickr In the Select Images screen click ce Import photos from photo sharing sites The Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window appears Seemed 10 image s Search Rents 10 image s Note You can also display the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window by clicking 4 Import photos from photo sharing sites in the Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Page 189 of 707 pages E Add Image When you click D Import photos from photo sharing sites a message about created works and personality rights appear To hide the message select the Do not show this message again checkbox See Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window for details on the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window 2 Enter the search text in Search 3 Set Sort by Number of Results per Page and License Type 4 Click Start Search Search starts then the images that match the search text appear in the Thumbnail window P important Some images such as images in formats other than JPEG do not appear ES Note Click q Back to t
529. ssage again check box For details on the settings to print envelopes see Loading Envelopes To cancel a print job in progress press the Stop Reset button on the machine or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor To display the printer status monitor click the printer icon on the taskbar In Windows Vista operating system hereafter referred to as Windows Vista or Windows XP click Canon XXX Printer where XXX is your machine s name on the taskbar f printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 30 of 707 pages Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Page 31 of 707 pages Basic Guide ied Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX C054 Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Easy WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer You can print web pages automatically resized to fit the paper width without cutting off the sides of pages or preview and select the desired web pages to print Easy WebPrint EX requires Internet Explorer 7 or later gt Important It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by th
530. ssified You can search for images by category See Searching Images for details Creating Custom Categories 1 Inthe View amp Use window sort images by category and click Edit Custom Categories The Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens Edit Custom Categories eS You can ad delete custom categories geste bin OK Cno 2 Click Add to List The Add Category dialog box opens 3 Enter Category name and click OK EA Note You can create up to 20 custom categories Up to 50 single byte characters can be used for a category name Double click a created category to open the Change Category Name dialog box in which you can change the category name Select a custom category and click Delete to delete it Related Topic Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Classifying Images into Categories Page 380 of 707 pages View amp Use Window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Page 381 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX S500 MP Navigator EX Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images Saving scanned images to computer Saving Saving scanned image a
531. ssword protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box Page 464 of 707 pages Setting Passwords for PDF Files P important PDF PDF Multiple Pages and PDF Add Page cannot be selected for images scanned from the Custom dialog box You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White e Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Exif Settings When Save as type is JPEG Exif you can input Exif information into the file to be saved Exif Settings Dialog Box e Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening editing and printing created PDF files s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files Note This function is available only when Save as type is PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page e Addto This is displayed when you select PDF Add Page for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added To change the file click Browse to specify another one P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You can
532. sted Cyan is increased Red is increased gt Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 515 of 707 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Brightness and Contrast S304 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast In ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab click di Brightness Contrast ES Note Click Down arrow to switch to detailed view Click Up arrow to return to the previous view Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel e Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined e Red Adjust the Red channel e Green Adjust the Green channel e Blue Adjust the Blue channel Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 516 of 707 pages EE Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Brightness Adjust the image brightness Move Slider under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 mes Dark Bright E Note Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image to
533. stom Pian Paper Color intensty Lotter 85 11 215 2279 4m Ago Manus Oc F Preview betore parting 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is converted to grayscale data It allows you to print the color document in monochrome P important When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data In this case actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data convert the data to sRGB data using an application software Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 284 of 707 pages ES Note During Grayscale Printing color inks may be used as well as black ink Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Specifying Color Correction Page 285 of 707 pages AJS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction P013 Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed Normally the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer This method is suitable for printing sRGB data When you want to pr
534. sults Not Satisfactory gt Back of the Paper Is Smudged U318 Back of the Paper Is Smudged e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine Routine Maintenance ES Note When performing borderless printing duplex printing or too much printing the inside may become stained with ink Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Page 627 of 707 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout U319 Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the size of the loaded paper correct The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that you have specified Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded Print Results Not Satisfactory ES Note The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting This machine performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean A small amount of ink is ejected for cleaning Although ink is usually ejected on the ink abso
535. systems according to the OS of each system Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Settings on Print Server Page 698 of 707 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Print Server P043 Settings on Print Server When you use the printer on a network set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows 1 Install the printer driver on the print server system For details on installation instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started 2 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers e f you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e f you are using Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes The Devices and Printers window Windows 7 or Printers window Windows Vista or Printers and Faxes window Windows XP is displayed 3 Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared e If you are using Windows 7 press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Printer properties gt Sharing tab from the displayed File menu e If you are using Windows Vist
536. t Canon lJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver b How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon lJ Preview Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printer Driver Operations Canon Printer Driver Operations MA 6355 V 1 00 Page 313 of 707 pages a m Instructions for Use Printer Driver How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Execute Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changin
537. t PDF file Window Print Document Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Send via E mail Dialog Box Correct Enhance Images Window Custom Scan with One click Tab One click Mode Screen Auto Scan Dialog Box Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen e Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen PDF Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box s gt Custom Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC e Scan Settings Dialog Box Scanner Button Settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Navigation Mode Screen Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Navigation Mode Screen S735 MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode Screen This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX Select an icon at the top of the screen to display the corresponding tab Use each tab depending on what you want to do Scan Import Documents or Images Auto Scan Photos Documents Platen iad m 2 Show fiz window of tatup FT Preterences Scan Import Scan photos and documents gt Scan Import Documents or Images Tab View amp Use You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e mail You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab One cl
538. t a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab 1 Set the custom size in the application software On your application s paper size feature specify the custom size P important When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the height and width values use the application software to set the values When the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly use the printer driver to set the values 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the paper size Select Custom for Page Size on the Page Setup tab FR Gack Senp lt gt Man 5B Page Seto gk Efecte A Martenance a Same os Page Size Page Layout Nomalsize a E 8 Custom 350x1107 Nomalsizne Bordetess FatoPage Scaled Page Layout g Gd a J Atoreatically reduce large document that the perter cannet ouput Duplex Parting Staple Sde Lorg ede stapling Qen Sprcty Maran Goes gt 1 995 1 n i E Port iom Last Page glate Cox ce toe Glo The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Gino Pape Sie EA Unts zm Spo Paper Sre Wah 850 A ches 217 1654 Height 1100 gt inches 5826 61 0K ce te 4 Set the custom paper size Specify Units and enter the Width and Height of
539. t in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Sharpener Function 4 Click Face Sharpener Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener 5 Click OK The face is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation f you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Sharpener Correct Enhance Face Shopernt Reems Wear a Stog Spect thre area you wart lo conect of Digtal Face Smoothing 92 Blemish Remover Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 165 of 707 pages Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 166 of
540. t supports XPS printing P important To use the XPS printer driver the standard IJ printer driver must already be installed on your computer With the XPS printer driver application software distributed with printers such as Easy PhotoPrint EX and My Printer cannot be used Installing the XPS Printer Driver Load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the machine and then select XPS Printer Driver from Custom Install to install the driver Using the XPS Printer Driver To use the XPS printer driver for printing open the Print dialog box in application you are using and select your printer name XPS O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 316 of 707 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window P409 How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing 1 Select the command that you perform printing on the application software In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select
541. t the image you want to delete and click t Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click ay Delete All Imported Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 129 of 707 pages EE Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 130 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Editing A044 Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede candar as needed Insert taxt add mages or change layout Edit Tools Insde Pages EEEE General Toos A EIE 2 Edit the calendar if necessary b Changing Layout gt Changing Background m Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos s gt Setting Calendar Display gt Setting Holidays P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited calendar It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again gt Saving E Note
542. tarting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Yes or Continue Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning 2 Execute the uninstaller Click Execute When the confirmation message appears click Yes When all the files have been deleted click Complete The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete P important Printer driver and scanner driver ScanGear will be deleted when you uninstall the MP Drivers When There is No Uninstaller When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows 7 or Windows Vista follow these steps 1 Select the printer to be deleted e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Remove device e f you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Delete 2 Delete the printer e If you are using Windows 7 when the confirmation message appears click Yes Then when the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes
543. te See Scanning in Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by automatically detecting the document type You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab Use the Advanced Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode output resolution image brightness and color tone See the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab Basic Mode Tab m Advanced Mode Tab 1 Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear Placing Documents Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 2 Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 504 of 707 pages TEET El Adjant cropping frames image corrections em CFan corrector E Ceci corrector f Coko Pattern 3 Click Preview Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area Images are cropped scan areas are specified automatically according to the document size aae 4 Set Destination 5 Set Output Size 6 Adjust the scan areas cropping frames and set Image corrections as required EA Note You can correct each image separately Select the frame you want to correct In thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame scan area per image To create multiple cropping frames in an image
544. te You can crop images or print dates on photos Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box a To display the Preferences dialog box click ost Settings or select Preferences from the File menu See Help for details on the Layout Print screen QO Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 111 of 707 pages Creating an Album Page 112 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album A020 Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Changing Layout s gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text
545. ted the scanned image appears in the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Page 573 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Other Scanning Methods gt Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only S605 Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware gt Scanners and Cameras then double click WIA Canon model name The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box opens 3 Click Next 4 Select Picture type according to the document to be scanned gt Scanner and Camera Wizard x Choare Scanning Preferences g i Dooie you scaring petfermnces and then R Povie 80 bee Now you piloiencer aiat G ri he pete Pise toe Loker pacnae O Giayccate pietro Sa O Black and phe penae oe best Oma E8 Note To scan with the values previously set in Custom settings select Custom 5 Click Custom settings to set the preferences as required Properties RerohsonOP Picture ype 150 e Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 e Contrast Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Usi
546. ted in the Advanced Adjustment dialog box e Defaults Resets all settings brightness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal e Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image e Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced adjusted image the selected one e Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 446 of 707 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Page 447 of 707 pages e Exit Closes the Correct Enhance Images window Correction Enhancement 93 Digtal Face Smoothing BO sen henow e Face Brightener Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles in the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Blemish Remover Removes moles in the selected area e OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area e Undo Cancels the latest correction enhancement e Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image e Save Selected Image Save
547. the Print History Page 684 of 707 pages Reprinting from the Print History When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting the document printed from the preview is saved and you can reprint the document with the same settings 1 Displaying the print history Select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt View Print History XPS The saved print document is displayed in the preview P important To limit the number of print history registrations click History Entry Limit on the File menu If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded the print history registrations are deleted starting from the oldest one 2 Selecting a print document From the Document Name list select the document to be printed 3 Executing print Click Print Related Topic Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 685 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Deleting the Undesired Print Job P037 Deleting the Undesired Print Job If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information If the printer does not start printing cancelled or failed print job data may be remaining Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor 1 Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor
548. the printer driver on the client systems For installation instructions see Installing the MP Drivers ES Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Settings on Client PC Page 700 of 707 pages 2 Start the wizard Select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes gt Add a printer When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears click Next 3 Add a printer Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer then click Next On the Specify a Printer window click Next and then search for the print server system Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next ES Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 701 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advance
549. the right To print the background at the original bitmap intensity move the slider to the rightmost position 6 Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 7 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Changing and Registering Some Background Settings 1 Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Check the Background check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the background you want to change from the Background list 2 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens 3 Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 274 of 707 pages 4 Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab When you want to save the background with a different title enter a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1 Click Select Background in the Stamp Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens 2
550. ting the data the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact When printing the data the printer applies fine adjustment results such as brightness adjustments made with an application software Printing with ICC Profiles Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 288 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver P015 Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print SRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them use a printing ICC profile in the application software and select setting
551. tings Dialog Box You can input Exif information into a file to be saved Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG Embedding Exif information into scanned images allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images The Exif Settings dialog box can be opened when Save as type is JPEG Exif ps l Baso hiomaton ton Vue Ed veson 2n M Canon Model p Share MP Nyaga EX Star si Coler Space sRGB may Wah 1876p Aso Erponse image Lergh 1020jpoonts XResokton Y Reschton xo E Advanced irfomnaton ton Ve Descrpten aa Date Time Cignal Some Coote Type Epcare Mode Susy Seeed Vous lt iephy the Same Seting of bout tems Atomatcaty ISO Speed Putra p bey C C r e Basic Information Displays the information obtained automatically from the machine or software e Advanced Information Displays the information specified on the right side of the screen e Advanced Information Settings Area You can input Exif information such as the title and shooting data Select the checkbox of the items you want to specify and select or enter information e Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically Select this checkbox to automatically display the information you specified for the previous image e Apply After specifying all the information you need click Apply to embed it into the image The information appears in Advanced Information e
552. tion 5 Open the printer driver setup window 1 Select Print on the File menu or the command bar in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your machine s name is selected E8 Note If another printer s name is selected click and select your machine s name 3 Click Preferences or Properties a Pv wrew Saa Pros S ona roa Ga Locator 88 Mirme Poa Hore ss Mate J coon as AI 33 Gurciwonyeonnpastey cue 1 1 peana fo earch 57 Loim cmn 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings E8 Note When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Page 29 of 707 pages Commonly Used Settings the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also appear 2 Make sure of the displayed settings Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type Standard in Print Quality and A4 in Printer Paper Size are selected ES Note When you specify two or more copies in Copies the printed pages will be collated The settings can be changed However after changing Printer Paper Size confirm that the setting for Page Size on the Page Setup sheet matches the setting set in the software application For details refer to the on
553. tion Menu EX the on screen manual or other supplied software applications you want to use from the Setup CD ROM when they have not been installed or have been uninstalled To install them select them in Custom Install Menus are displayed in Category Menu Area of Solution Menu EX Main Screen Click a menu in Category Menu Area to display icons for functions available in that menu in Function Icon Area of Main Screen The number and types of icons or menus displayed in Main Screen may vary depending on your machine and region The screen below is for Windows 7 B C A B Function Icon Area C Category Menu Area D Desktop Accessory Shortcut menu to which you can add the icons of frequently used functions Accessory Icon that lets you display Main Screen show or hide Shortcut menu etc Photo Print Print photos taken with a digital camera Use Scanner Scan photos or documents Canon Web Service Download content or materials from the website for printing Help amp Settings View the Solution Menu EX online help or the on screen manual of the machine Set up Solution Menu EX or the machine Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Various Software Applications Page 34 of 707 pages Start Application Start the supplied software applications such as Easy PhotoPrint EX and My Printer With My Printer you can display the printer driver setup window and get information on what action to take if y
554. tness of the specified portion of the image is optimized Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image e None Image Adjustment will not be applied e Auto Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type It is recommended that you normally select this setting e Photo Applies Image Adjustment suitable for photos e Magazine Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 544 of 707 pages Applies Image Adjustment suitable for magazines e Newspaper Applies Image Adjustment suitable for newspapers e Document Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents P important You can set Image Adjustment after preview You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Note If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto specify the document type The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment In that case set Image Adjustment to None e Unsharp Mask When this is set to ON the outline of the subjects is emphasized to sharpen the image e Descreen Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned D
555. to Photos s gt Saving Opening Saved Files Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating an Album Page 113 of 707 pages Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File s What Is C1 or C4 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 114 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A021 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seler the Ram you wart to create from the manu Seber LORY Co access saved tems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 115 of 707 pages AJni Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A022 rl amp Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Album from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty abun structure paper Sze etc m General Settrigs then select a theme Cick the buttons at the bottom of the screen to spect y layout ang background After spectying pacer sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Sett
556. to Print file el6 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file el4 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 104 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos A010 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts You can also create borderless photos easily Corrections suitable for photos can be applied automatically when printing Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting a Photo 3 Selecting the Paper 4 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites s gt Printing Vivid Photos gt Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page s Printing an Index s gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print s gt Printing Photo Information s gt Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 105 of 707 pages gt How Can Move or Copy the Saved File s Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start fro
557. to text refer to Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Various Scan Settings Page 338 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Appendix Various Scan Settings S010 Appendix Various Scan Settings e Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine gt Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navig Page 339 of 707 pages AJS Gilets Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Appendix Various Scan Settings gt Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX S007 MP Navigator EX Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX enables you to specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine 1 Start MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX 2 Click Preferences 2 E tember atte A The Preferences dialog box opens E Note The Preferences dialog box can also be opened by clicking Preferences in the One click Mode screen 3 On the Scanner Button Settings tab specify Actions Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com
558. tor EX Screens gt Save Dialog Box S731 MP Navigator EX Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you scan from the Save dialog box or Custom dialog box of the One click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails 4 Save the mage to the spectied folder Save as hype JPEG Jet gt san Eat Snn Password securty settings Retare het 99 Rotate Fapte 0 Drag he mage to rearrange the files Ble name mG Save in CALs se Nano Pichres MP Navigator X 2010_0 Browse W Save to a Subfolder wth Gurert Date sre i e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif TIFF BMP PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file E8 Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are scanned e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well f apa
559. tridge Holder moves to the replacement position Caution Do not hold the FINE Cartridge Holder to stop or move it forcibly Do not touch the FINE Cartridge Holder until it stops completely gt Important The inside of the machine may be stained with ink Be careful not to stain your hands or clothing when replacing FINE Cartridges You can easily wipe off the ink from the inside of the machine with tissue paper or the like For details on the cleaning refer to the printed manual Getting Started Do not place any object on the Document Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction When opening the Scanning Unit Cover lift it with the Document Cover closed Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine If the Scanning Unit Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the FINE Cartridge Holder moves to the right In this case close and reopen the Scanning Unit Cover 3 Remove the empty FINE Cartridge 1 Pinch the tabs and open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover 2 Remove the FINE Cartridge gt Important Handle FINE Cartridges carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area Discard empty FINE Cartridges according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables 4 Prepare the new FINE Cartridge 1 Take a new FINE Cartridge out of its package and remove the orange protectiv
560. ts written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly In that case select the scanned image in the Thumbnail window of the Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window and rotate it with Edit Tools Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images e Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist e Defaults Restore the default settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box Page 424 of 707 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save Dialog Box S716 MP Navigator EX Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan Import window In the Save dialog box you can make settings for saving images to a computer Seve in C
561. tton repeatedly until the LED displays as follows 2 Load only the desired number of sheets to copy ES Note Pressing the Stop Reset button returns the number of copies to 1 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Page 328 of 707 pages 6 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts borderless copying Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is complete To make 10 to 19 copies The paper out error will occur when all of the loaded paper runs out Press the Stop Reset button to release the error P important Do not open the Document Cover or remove the original from the Platen Glass until copying is complete Note Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Page 329 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning Scanning gt Scanning Images s Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine s gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Scanning with Other Application Software Other Scanning Methods Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Page 330 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images Scann
562. u can easily scan documents that are larger than the Platen using MP Navigator EX It allows you to scan the left and right halves of a document separately and combine them back into one image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using MP Navigator EX Page 707 of 707 pages Scan with One click In One click Mode MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving with a click of an icon One click Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e mail automatically Er Ke I 7 N i s XK jpg anor Scan and Correct Enhance Photos You can easily correct enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX You do not need to use other applications For details on how to use MP Navigator EX refer to Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
563. u can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Vier 850 inches 1 008 50 Height 11 09 inches 1 00 11 65 Lrs nch Coo n P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Dialog Box Page 467 of 707 pages that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents Resolution e Specify Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings gt Scan Settings Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file
564. uals Registering a Stamp Page 269 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp P404 Registering a Stamp This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used You can create and register a new stamp You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows Registering a New Stamp 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab TR sek Seem gt Man A Pose Sete gf Breca Ah Martenance El Pope Sue Letter 8 551 gt amp Orientation la O Pora A Langecape M Rotate 180 degrees a ot Same as Page Size Page Layout Noenalsize ahaa a as ii seamen trem tome neh ntti g Ga J m V Atoraticaly reduce large document that the perter cannnt ouput Staple Sde Lengde taping Lett Spectr Marge wy oe i El Port iom Last Page Collate sa 0K cance top He Place stamp over texs Stare first page only Background frn page ordy Cx Gee Coe Ge Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and only the stamp function can be used
565. uals Starting MP Navigator EX Page 345 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Starting MP Navigator EX S111 Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt MP Navigator EX 4 0 gt MP Navigator EX 4 0 MP Navigator EX starts Col Ge View amp Use One click Scan Import Documents or Images Scanfiepost ES Auto Scan WS Photos Documents Platen S e E Show his window af statu 11 Proterences E Starting One click Mode 1 Click P Switch Mode at the bottom left of the screen View amp Use Scan Import Documents or Images Auto Scan Photos Documents Platen 1T Preece 2 The One click Mode screen appears Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting MP Navigator EX Page 346 of 707 pages f Preferences Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open the Navigation Mode screen at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears at startup Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Page 347 of 707 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Easy Scanning
566. ust attachment file size When the file type is JPEG selecting this checkbox allows you to resize the images Select a size from Size e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one If resized the resized images are saved By default the scanned images are saved in the following folders Windows 7 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e File name Enter the file name of the image to be attached up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Set You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Send via E mail Dialog Box Page 442 of 707 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 443 of 707 pages Adana gids Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Correct Enhance Images Window S712 MP Navigator EX Correct Enhance Images Window Click P Image Correction Enhancement in the View amp Use window or click Fix photo images in Image Handling Buttons to open the Correct Enhance Images window In the Correct Enhance Images window you can
567. ustom Cateoonns Spocity Folder v Preto wais Selected 5 Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Ent C Wserz UverMame Pictured MP Nevigater 02010 At _01 003 jpg E8 Note If you selected only one image in the View amp Use window the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears 4 Make sure that Auto is selected 5 Click Auto Photo Fix Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing Aado Preto Fin Face Shapener OE dosracesncotes Ent P important Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies EA Note The Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons When you apply Auto Photo Fix dark backlit photos will be corrected automatically If the image is not corrected enough using Auto Photo Fix it is recommended that you apply Face Brightener on the Manual tab Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 367 of 707 pages Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Page 368 of 707 pages 6 Click OK The entire image is corrected enhanced automatically and F Correct Enhance mark appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image
568. utput Size Select an output size Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying Select Add Delete to set custom size and save it as a new output size option e Flexible You can specify the output resolution and scale and adjust the cropping frame In thumbnail view Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned When no cropping frame is displayed each frame is scanned individually In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed the entire Preview area will be scanned When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned E8 Note To enlarge reduce the scanned image enter values into a Width and 5 Height in Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Output Settings Page 541 of 707 pages Output Settings or specify a value by 1 for The maximum value available for depends on the Output Resolution can be specified for up to 19200 dpi the maximum available output resolution e Paper Size L etc amp Monitor Size 1024 x 768 pixels etc o Width Height and scale cannot be specified The preview image will be cropped according to the selected output size and resolution The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper monitor size You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge r
569. vailable when Color Mode is Color Source Scanner Select scanner profile Target Select target profile Monitor Select this to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor Defaults Returns to the default Color Matching settings e None Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear scanner driver EA Note Color Matching is available when ScanGear monitor color management compliant application such as Adobe Photoshop and printer are set up correctly Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor printer and application settings e Monitor Gamma By setting the gamma value of a monitor you can adjust the input data to the brightness Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Settings Tab Page 559 of 707 pages characteristics of the monitor Adjust the value if your monitor s gamma value does not match the default value set in ScanGear and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value 2 20 Note Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value If it is not written in the manual contact the manufacturer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Page 560 of 707 pages Adana gids Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on S
570. ve them to a computer before clicking Clear e Save Save the selected images Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings gt Save Dialog Box e Save as PDF file Save the selected images as PDF files Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the save settings Save as PDF file Dialog Box e Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu Toolbar e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions m Preferences Dialog Box o Guide Opens this guide e Edit Tools Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 419 of 707 pages mm e Select All Selects all images in the Thumbnail window o iii Cancel All Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window e L Rotate Left Rotates the target image outlined in orange 90 degrees counter clockwise Rotate Right Rotates the target image outlined in orange 90 degrees clockwise A Invert Inverts the target image outlined in orange horizontally jm Trimming Trims the target image outlined in orange Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest Click this button to open the Crop window and specify the trimming frame mli aa Zoom in Enlarges the target image outlined in orange You c
571. ved problems may be solved Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model P important You can download the MP Drivers for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest MP Drivers delete the previously installed version For information on how to delete the MP Drivers see Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Related Topics Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 688 of 707 pages Nelieiejecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers P039 Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers The MP Drivers which you no longer use can be deleted When deleting the MP Drivers first exit all programs that are running The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows When There is an Uninstaller 1 Start the uninstaller e f you are using Windows 7 Windows Vista select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt MP Drivers Uninstaller e If you are using Windows XP select the start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt MP Drivers Uninstaller The MP Drivers Uninstaller dialog box is displayed P important In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when s
572. velopes before printing Once you have prepared the envelopes load them in portrait orientation If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation they will not feed properly e Check 4 Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear Tray Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 637 of 707 pages If the paper tears in the Rear Tray see Paper Jams to remove it If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the machine unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object e Check 5 Clean the Paper Feed Roller Routine Maintenance ES Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Jams Page 638 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams U328 Paper Jams Note If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing press the Stop Reset button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray In Other Cases Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray
573. w to load printing paper in the Rear Tray and how to load originals to copy or scan Loading Paper Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Loading Originals Loading Originals Originals You Can Load A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Paper be Guide E w Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper C073 Loading Paper m Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper m Loading Envelopes sp Media Types You Can Use m Media Types You Cannot Use m Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper gt Important If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm or 2 16 x 3 58 55 0 x 91 0 mm Card size to perform trial print it can cause paper jams ES Note We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos For details on the Canon genuine paper see Media Types You Can Use You can use general copy paper For the page size and paper weight you can use for this machine see Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare paper Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it EA Note Align the edges of paper neatly before loading Loading paper without aligning the edges may cause paper jams f paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat For details on
574. want to cowect E Note Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Moles in and around the selected area are removed andthe amp Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E8 Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 172 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Adjusting Images A067 Easy PhotoPrint EX Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Image
575. wers gt What Is C1 or C4 A098 al E What Is C1 or C4 When an album is printed labels such as C1 and C4 are printed as page numbers The C1 and C4 represent the front cover and back cover respectively C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover C4 Back cover ES Note C2 C3 appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank Leave the inside of back cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photo Print Settings Page 199 of 707 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings A101 Photo Print Settings Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page s Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information s gt Saving Photos s gt Opening Saved Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Vivid Photos Page 200 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Vivid Photos A071 Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to
576. when you want to print from the first page Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print out all pages in each copy together Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with the same page number together e Print from Last Page E Collate W a e Print from Last Page 7 Collate Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 246 of 707 pages IAD A 2 Lag owe Ly 2 3 K e Print from Last Page W Collate E 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order P important When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function give priority to the printer driver settings However if the print results are not acceptable specify the function settings on the application software When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled a Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected for Page Layout Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page Layout ES Note By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate
577. while printing Confirm the message and take an appropriate Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Checking the Ink Status Page 66 of 707 pages action Follow the procedure below to open the confirmation screen Is Open the printer driver setup window Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click View Printer Status on the Maintenance sheet To confirm the FINE Cartridge information click the Ink Details menu Note While printing you can also display the printer status monitor by clicking the printer icon on the taskbar In Windows Vista or Windows XP click Canon XXX Printer where XXX is your machine s name on the taskbar O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Machine Page 67 of 707 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine Cleaning the Machine This section describes how to clean the inside of the machine s Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller m Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning m Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 68 of 707 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller C099 mw Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it paper may not be fe
578. will go out if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes To restore them press any button except the ON button or perform the print operation m Rear View 9 9 USB Port Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer gt Important Do not touch the metal casing Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals with the computer 10 Power Cord Connector Plug in the supplied power cord g Inside View Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 5 of 707 pages Main Components 13 12 15 11 Ink Cartridge Locking Covers Lock the FINE Cartridges into place 12 FINE Cartridge Holder Install the FINE Cartridges The Color FINE Cartridge should be installed into the left slot and the Black FINE Cartridge should be installed into the right slot 13 FINE Cartridges Ink Cartridges A replaceable cartridge that is integrated with Print Head and ink tank E8 Note For details on installing the FINE Cartridges refer to the printed manual Getting Started 14 Scanning Unit Cover Scans originals Open it to replace the FINE Cartridges or remove jammed paper inside the machine When opening the Scanning Unit Cover lift it with the Document Cover closed 15 Scanning Unit Support Holds the Scanning Unit Cover while it is open gt Important The area A indicated in the figure below may be splatter
579. wing section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8 5 x11 and A4 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Photos Page 211 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Saving Photos A092 Easy PhotoPrint EX Saving Photos You can save edited photos The information of cropping and layout can be saved Click Save in the Layout Print screen ome py rye etoPrer EX Select the layout you want to pret Check tne Preview ad chick the Prnt batian Printing starts G amp SRnaeiar Exif Print When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save Note Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 212 of 707 pages AJS Gites Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Opening Saved Files A093 Easy PhotoPrint EX g Opening Saved Files You ca
580. with the specified stamp Printing a Background Two bitmap files are pre registered as samples 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background dialog box opens 3 Select the background Check the Background check box and select the background to be used from the list The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the background details If necessary complete the following settings and then click OK Select Background button To use another background or change the layout or density of a background click this see Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Background first page only To print the background only on the first page check this check box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Stamp Background Printing Page 268 of 707 pages 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified background P important When Borderless is selected the Stamp Background Stamp button appears grayed out and is unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing Related Topics gt Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Man
581. y it in a different window e Printer Select the printer to use e Properties Displays the selected printer s advanced setting screen e Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine e Media Type Select the type of paper for printing Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type e Page Layout Select a print type e Normal size Printing Print one image per sheet e Fit to Page Printing Print an image at the paper size enlarged or reduced e Borderless Printing Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Photo Dialog Box Page 440 of 707 pages Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without borders P important Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing e Orientation Specify the print orientation P important This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal size Printing For others the image is automatically rotated according to the aspect ratio of the paper e Copies Specify the number of copies to print e Vivid Photo Select this checkbox to print the image in vivid colors e Preview before printing Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing e Print Starts printing Note Only the images in the Thumbnail window with the checkbox selected are printed e Close
582. you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures ES Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click ke Import to Inside Pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area EA Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click t Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click ay Delete All Imported Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 139 of 707 pages EE Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 140 of 707 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Editing A054 ee Errr Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Egg stckers as needed Insert text add kragas or cha
583. your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window appears E8 Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure printing profile that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers e f you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e f you are using Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window appears P important Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties Windows 7 or Properties Windows Vista Windows XP displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software For tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows O Page top
584. ype from High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression 4 Click OK Files are saved according to the settings and the e mail software program starts 5 Specify the recipient enter the subject and message then send e mail For details refer to the manual of the e mail software program Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Files Page 395 of 707 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Editing Files S505 Editing Files You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine After scanning documents and saving them open the View amp Use window to select what you want to do with the images to select tho image 3T _ Preteswnces 7 H P Gi cama A 9 a aye Al Cateqoees Edt Custom Categones Spectr Fobler Recent Soredianss CCO I v Pwo Wager Giod Y Pots ip Selected 2 My Box Ta l DO Ore A Edil Convent Fix photo mage Correest 1o teat the Jue to Man Meru le _ Case Merhume Dceaes MO Navigator EX 1 080 jog Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer Correcting Photo Images You can correct enhance images
585. ze This setting is automatically set e Resolution This setting is automatically set e Specify Select whether or not to apply suitable corrections based on the document type Scan Settings Dialog Box Scanner Button Settings Save Settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Button Settings Tab Save to PC Page 485 of 707 pages e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File Name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files e File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif or TIFF P important When Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents ES Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards BD DVD CD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set e Set When Save as type is Auto Opens the Auto Save Settings dialog box in which you can specify the file format and other advanced save settings Select a file format for it
586. zing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Printing Photos S503 Printing Photos You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine After scanning documents and saving them open the View amp Use window to select how you want to print the photos Diek to select tho image ET Pretecerces H P Gi Zann JA 9 a ji ayes owe At AJ Categones Edt Custom Categones v From Wager Giod v Pota leper Selected 2 i wO e 9 j Bom 2 v Oe lager Selected Ip Llores Pret Document Port Photo Prt Aasra Seloctions oh gt Sond EdivConvon Jumo to Man Meru CAlrerdtherName Pichari MP Navigator EXI901 AVOL jeg Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer When Printing Photos Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX enables you to print scanned photos at high quality or to layout and print images 1 Select images and click Print 2 Click Print Photo or Print Album on the list Easy PhotoPrint EX starts See Printing with the Bundled Application Software for details E8 Note a If Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed print with MP Navigator EX When Printing Photos Using MP Navigator EX 1 Select images and click Print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 392 of 707 pages 2

Canon PIXMA MP282 User Guide Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents